JP6103519B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that outputs test firing test data to the outside of the gaming machine has been disclosed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In the technique of Patent Document 1, in the normal state (the condition device operation signal is OFF and the special region ineffective state), the firing position designation signal 1 corresponding to the left strike is output, and in the special region effective state, the medium strike is performed. When the corresponding launch position designation signal 2 is output and the condition device operation signal is ON, the launch position designation signal 3 corresponding to the right strike (how to strike the big winning opening installed in the right area in the game area) Is output.

  As described above, according to the technique of Patent Document 1, since the firing position designation signal according to the state such as the normal state or the big hit state is output, accurate test test data can be obtained according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. It is thought that you can.

  Also, as another prior art, a technique is known in which a plurality of types of mode flags for a gaming state are prepared according to the contents of the jackpot symbol, and a right-handed determination is made by referring to which mode the player is staying. (For example, refer to Patent Document 2).

  In the technique of Patent Document 2, in addition to the flag for the gaming state, information on the number value depending on the number of times of change of the special symbol is held, and a predetermined value is substituted into the number value at the time of mode transition, When it becomes “0”, the mode flag is changed to shift to the mode A in the normal state, and it is determined that the player is left-handed.

  For this reason, according to Patent Document 2, it is considered that left-handed or right-handed can be efficiently determined using control parameters such as a mode flag and a count value.

  Furthermore, as a prior art different from these, there is a gaming machine that executes a right-handed instruction using a movable effect member when the state shifts to a right-handed state (see, for example, Patent Document 3).

  As described above, in the technique of Patent Document 3, since a right-handed instruction is executed using a movable effect member, it is considered that an appropriate direction for launching a game ball can be visually advised even for beginners. It is done.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-253698 JP 2011-104202 A JP 2010-263992 A

  The above-described prior art is advantageous in that it solves various problems related to the direction in which the game ball is fired from an original viewpoint.

  Here, as has also appeared in the prior art described above, in recent gaming machines, there are an increasing number of gaming machines that use left-handed and right-handed depending on the gaming state. For example, if the normal mode is in the non-time shortening state, left-handed is performed, and if the time-short mode is in the time shortening state, right-handed is performed.

  In this case, the gaming machine determines that it is left-handed if it is in a non-time shortened state, and it is determined that it is right-handed if it is in a time-shortened state. Problems may occur in relation to the lamp).

  Here, the launch position designation display lamp is a lamp that designates the launch direction of the game ball. For example, it indicates left-handed in the unlit state and right-handed in the lit state. The launch position designation display lamp is supposed to display a region with a higher ball-out rate, that is, “the region that is advantageous to the player”.

  And if you use the right-handed specification in the time shortening state, the game will progress right-handed during the time shortening state, so specify the launch position during the time shortening state The indicator lamp needs to be turned on.

  However, even in a model that adopts right-handed in a time-saving state, there are cases where it is more advantageous for the player to left-handed depending on the situation. For example, if the normal symbol is not likely to fluctuate for some reason (such as the state of the nail of the gaming machine or the individual difference of the gaming machine) in the time shortening state, the normal electric accessory is also difficult to operate. For this reason, it may be advantageous to advance the game by left-handed rather than right-handed.

  In addition, even if a normal symbol or a special symbol frequently fluctuates in a time shortening state, a state in which there is no possibility of a game ball entering the various accessory devices continues for a long time (for example, fluctuation When the time is long, or when the end time of various accessory devices is set long, for example, a situation in which right-handedness is not generally advantageous may occur.

  In such a situation, as in the prior art described above, when the launch position is determined according to the rough game state such as whether or not a big hit, etc., the determination content regarding the launch position determined by the gaming machine and the actual There is a possibility that a deviation occurs from the launch position advantageous to the player, and the player's profit may be lost due to the deviation.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique that can appropriately determine the launch position of a game ball in a form directly linked to actual profit.

The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution is a first game machine that is installed in a first game area and generates a first stage lottery opportunity when game balls flowing down the first game area pass randomly. The first stage lottery opportunity is generated by a game gate that is installed in a start gate and a second game area that is disadvantageous to the first game area and flows down the second game area at random. When the first stage lottery opportunity occurs during the game with the second start gate, the first stage lottery related to the generation of the second stage lottery opportunity different from the first stage lottery opportunity is executed The first stage lottery executing means, and when the second stage lottery trigger occurs during the game, the second stage lottery related to whether or not a specific condition should be applied as the condition of the first stage lottery Second stage lottery execution means to execute, and the first stage When the first stage lottery is executed by the selection execution means, the first symbol is displayed in a manner that displays the result of the first stage lottery after the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. When the second stage lottery is executed by the symbol display means and the second stage lottery executing means, the second stage lottery is displayed in a manner that displays the second symbol in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. The second symbol display means for stopping and displaying the second symbol, and the second symbol display means installed in the second game area, and when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by the first symbol display means, A variable start winning device for performing an operation of changing from a non-operating state in which the second stage lottery trigger is difficult to an operating state in which the second stage lottery trigger is easily generated, and the second game area; Installed and front When the second symbol display means stops and displays the second symbol in a specific winning manner, it is easy to generate the special prize from a non-operating state where it is difficult to generate a special prize over a specified period. When a lottery result indicating that the specific condition is applied to the first stage lottery in the second stage lottery is obtained in a variable winning device that executes a special game by performing an operation that changes to an operating state, After the end of the special game by the variable winning device, the second stage is more frequently compared with the non-time shortened state from the non-time shortened state where the lottery trigger for the second stage lottery occurs at least at a normal frequency. A time shortening state transition means for shifting to a time shortening state in which a lottery opportunity for lottery occurs and a start condition for starting the variable display of the first symbol by the first symbol display means are satisfied. If the first stage lottery trigger occurs before the first stage lottery, the lottery element acquisition means for acquiring the lottery element necessary for the execution of the first stage lottery and the lottery element acquired by the lottery element acquisition means are stored. It is determined whether or not a predetermined condition regarding the lottery element storage means and the launch position of the game ball is satisfied, and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the game ball should be launched into the first game area While the predetermined condition is satisfied, the launch position determining means for determining that the game ball should be launched into the second game area, and at least the predetermined condition as the predetermined condition A gaming machine comprising firing position designation condition defining means for defining a condition related to the number of stored lottery elements in a time shortening state.

In the gaming machine of this solution, for example, the game proceeds in the following flow.
(1) In the first game area (left-handed area), a first start gate (medium start gate) that generates a first stage lottery opportunity when game balls flowing down the first game area randomly pass ) Is installed.
(2) In the second game area (right-handed area), which is disadvantageous to the first game area, game balls flowing down the second game area pass at random to generate the first stage lottery opportunity A second start gate (right start gate) is installed.

  Here, “disadvantage” means that there are few profits. For example, by arranging a normal winning opening just below the first starting gate arranged in the first gaming area, and arranging a normal winning opening at a position shifted from just below the second starting gate arranged in the second gaming area, As a result, the game balls that have passed through the first start gate are more likely to enter the normal winning opening, so that the second game area can be made more disadvantageous than the first game area.

  In addition, by arranging four normal winning holes in the first game area where the first starting gate is arranged, and arranging one normal winning opening in the second game area where the second starting gate is arranged, As a result, it is easier for the player to hit a game ball into the first game area, so that the second game area can be made more disadvantageous than the first game area.

(3) When a first stage lottery opportunity occurs during the game, “first stage lottery (normal symbol lottery)” is executed. The “first stage lottery” is a lottery related to the occurrence of a second stage lottery opportunity different from the first stage lottery opportunity.
(4) When the second stage lottery opportunity occurs during the game, the “second stage lottery (special symbol lottery)” is executed. Here, the “second stage lottery” is a lottery related to whether or not a specific condition should be applied as a condition for the first stage lottery. “Applying specific conditions” means, for the subsequent first stage lottery (normal symbol lottery), for example, the winning probability is set higher than the normal probability, or the variation time of the first symbol is shortened. It means to let you.

(5) When the first stage lottery in (3) is executed, the first symbol (ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the first stage lottery. The A certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) is required from the start of the variable display of the first symbol until the stop display is performed. Once the variable display of the symbol is started, the stop display is performed. The next first stage lottery is not performed until is completed.

(6) When the second stage lottery of (4) above is executed, the second symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the second stage lottery. The It takes a certain amount of time (variation time and stop display time) from the start of the variable display of the second symbol until the stop display is performed. Once the variable display of the symbol is started, the stop display is performed. The next second stage lottery is not performed until is completed. This is the same as the first design.

(7) When the winning result is obtained in the “first stage lottery” in (3) above, the variable start winning device installed in the second game area performs an operation of changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. . During this time, the variable start winning device can generate the second stage lottery opportunity. If the winning is not obtained in the “first stage lottery”, the player will challenge the “first stage lottery” again.

(8) When the winning result is obtained in the “second stage lottery” in (4) above, the variable winning device installed in the second game area is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state over a specified period. A special game is executed by performing. During this time, the variable winning device can generate special winnings. It should be noted that the number of times that the variable winning device changes to the open state is at least twice.

(9) When a lottery result indicating that “specific conditions are applied to the first stage lottery” is obtained in the “second stage lottery” of (4) above, the special prize by the variable winning device of (8) above After the game ends (when the opening operation that changes from the closed state to the opened state is performed a plurality of times, after the opening operation for all the times is completed), the state is shifted from the “non-time shortened state” to the “time shortened state”.

Here, the “non-time reduction state” is a state in which a lottery opportunity for the second stage lottery of (4) occurs at least at a normal frequency, and a state in which so-called electric chew support is not performed.
On the other hand, the “time reduction state” is a state in which a lottery opportunity for the second stage lottery of (4) occurs more frequently than the “non-time reduction state”, and so-called electric chew support is performed. It is in a state.

(10) Start condition for starting the change display of the first symbol (for example, the condition that the first symbol is not changing and the first symbol stop display is confirmed when the previous change has been made) If the first stage lottery trigger occurs before is satisfied, the lottery elements (ordinary random numbers per symbol) necessary for executing the first stage lottery are acquired. In order to execute the first stage lottery, a lottery opportunity must be generated as a precondition. For this reason, the player plays a game with the goal of passing the game ball through the middle start gate or the right start gate, which is the lottery opportunity of the first stage lottery. The lottery opportunity in the first stage occurs randomly (or accidentally or randomly). When a lottery opportunity occurs randomly, a lottery element is acquired each time.

(11) The lottery elements acquired in the above (10) are stored in the order of acquisition. However, a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4) is provided for the number of memories, and the number of memories does not increase beyond this upper limit.

(12) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition (right-handed condition) relating to the launch position of the game ball is satisfied. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first game area (left-handed area) When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined that a game ball should be fired in the second game area (right-handed area).

(13) Various conditions can be set as the predetermined condition of (12), and as one of the conditions, a condition relating to the number of lottery elements stored in the time reduction state can be defined. As an example, a condition that “the number of lottery elements stored in the time shortening state is 1 or more (the memory of lottery elements exists in the time shortening state)” can be set as a predetermined condition. . As a result, when the number of lottery elements stored in the time shortening state is “0”, it is determined that the game ball should be fired in the first game area (left-handed area). If the number of lottery elements stored is “1 or more”, it is determined that the game ball should be launched into the second game area (right-handed area).

Thus, according to this solution, the following gaming properties are exhibited.
When shifting from the “non-time reduction state” to the “time reduction state”, the specific conditions are applied to the first stage lottery. The probability of winning in the “one-stage lottery” is changed. For this reason, the frequency of winning in the “first stage lottery” in (3) above during the game is higher than in the “non-time shortened state”, and the operation by the variable start winning device in (7) is relatively high. Will be done. Therefore, the frequency of occurrence of the second stage lottery opportunity in (4) is also higher than in the “non-time-reduced state”. As a result, it is easy to proceed to the “second stage lottery” in the above (4) in a short time compared to the “non-time shortened state”.

  Then, for the time being, the game flow changes so that the “time reduction state” continues. However, the “time shortening state” is not permanent, and its end condition is set in advance based on game specifications or the like (for example, the passage of a predetermined number of fluctuations, the arrival of a predetermined limit number, etc.).

  In addition, in the present solution, a condition relating to the number of memories of the first symbol (ordinary symbol) in the time-reduced state is defined as the predetermined condition relating to the launch position of the game ball. For this reason, even in the same time shortening state, it is determined that the game ball should be launched into the first game area or the game ball should be launched into the second game area according to the value of the stored number. I can do it.

Here, in the present solution, since the second game area is a disadvantageous area than the first game area, it is basically better for a player to launch a game ball aiming at the first game area. Is advantageous.
However, once the time reduction state is entered, since the variable start winning device and the variable winning device are installed in the second game area, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable start winning device and the variable winning device. Two game areas are more advantageous.

  For this reason, even if the second game area is a disadvantageous area than the first game area, the second game area is more than the first game area in the situation where the variable start winning device and the variable winning device are operated. The reversal phenomenon occurs in an advantageous area. However, this reverse phenomenon is based on the premise that the variable start winning device and the variable winning device are operated. If the game ball does not pass through the second start gate, both the variable start winning device and the variable winning device will be used. Since it does not operate, it is advantageous for the player to eliminate the reverse phenomenon and launch the game ball aiming at the first game area as a rule.

Therefore, in the present solution means, as a predetermined condition relating to the launch position of the game ball, a condition relating to the number of memories of the first symbol (ordinary symbol) in the time-reduced state is defined. The launch position can be specified in consideration of That is, even in the same time shortening state, if the number of memories of the first symbol (ordinary symbol) is small (for example, 0), it is determined that the game ball should be launched into the first game area, If the number of symbols (ordinary symbols) is large (for example, one or more), it can be determined that the game ball should be launched into the second game area, and the launch position of the game ball can be used as an actual benefit. It can be determined appropriately in a directly connected form.
According to the present invention, since the firing position can be determined according to the number of memories of the first symbol, the firing position of the game ball can be appropriately determined in a form directly linked to the actual profit.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution is that in Solution 1, the firing position designation condition defining means defines, as the predetermined condition, a condition that the variable winning device is in an operating state. It is a featured gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present solution, a condition that the variable winning device is in an operating state is defined as a predetermined condition relating to the launch position of the game ball. For this reason, if the variable winning device is in an operating state, it is determined that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and as a result, it is determined that a game ball should be launched into the second game area.

Here, since the variable winning device is arranged in the second game area, when the variable winning device is in the operating state, the variable winning device is in the second game area regardless of whether or not the time saving state has been entered. A game ball needs to be fired.
In the present solution, since the condition that the variable winning device is in an operating state is defined as the predetermined condition relating to the shooting position of the game ball, it is possible to specify an appropriate firing position for the variable winning device. .

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution is the solution 1 or 2, wherein the launch position designation condition defining means is the predetermined condition when the variable start winning device is in an operating state in the non-time-reduced state. It is a gaming machine characterized by prescribing the condition of being.

  In the gaming machine of the present solution, a condition that the variable start winning device is in an operating state in a non-time-reduced state is defined as a predetermined condition relating to the launch position of the game ball. For this reason, if the variable start winning device is in an operating state in the non-time shortened state, it is determined that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and as a result, it is determined that a game ball should be launched into the second game area. The

Here, since the variable start winning device is arranged in the second game area, when the variable start winning apparatus is in an operating state, a game ball is launched into the second game area even in a non-time-reduced state. There is a need to.
And in this solution, since the condition that the variable start winning device is in the non-time shortened state is defined as the predetermined condition regarding the launch position of the game ball, even in the non-time shortened state It is possible to specify an appropriate launch position for the variable start winning device.

  Solving means 4: The gaming machine of the present solving means is that in the solving means 3, the launch position designation condition defining means is configured such that the variable start winning device returns from the open state to the closed state in the non-time shortened state. The gaming machine is characterized in that a condition that it is in the middle of an end time corresponding to a time until the start of variation of the first symbol is allowed is excluded from the predetermined condition.

In the solution described above, the condition that the variable start winning device is in an operating state in a non-time-reduced state is defined as a predetermined condition relating to the launch position of the game ball. The condition that the variable start winning device is in the middle of the end time (during the end time) corresponding to the time from when the variable start winning device returns from the open state to the closed state until the start of the variation of the first symbol is allowed is predetermined. It is excluded from the conditions.
For this reason, even if the variable start winning device is in the non-time shortened state and is in the operating state, it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and as a result, the game ball is placed in the first game area. It is determined that it should fire.

Here, since the opening operation of the variable start winning device has already ended during the end time of the variable start winning device, even if the game ball is fired into the second game area, the game ball enters the variable start winning device. There is no need to launch a game ball into the second game area.
Therefore, in the present solution means, it is possible to designate an appropriate firing position for the variable start winning device by excluding the condition that the variable start winning device is in the end time from the predetermined condition regarding the launch position of the game ball.

  Solution 5: The gaming machine according to this solution means that in any of solution means 1 to 4, the firing position designation condition defining means displays the first symbol in the time-reduced state as the predetermined condition. A condition that the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-reduced state, or a condition that the variable start winning device is in an operating state in the time-reduced state. Is a gaming machine characterized by

  In the gaming machine of this solving means, as the predetermined condition regarding the launch position of the game ball, the condition that the first symbol (ordinary symbol) is variably displayed in the time shortening state, and the first symbol (normally normal in the time shortening state) A condition that the symbol) is being displayed in a stopped state or a condition that the variable start winning device is in an operating state in a time-saving state is defined.

  Therefore, if the first symbol is in the variable display state, the stop display state, and the variable start winning device is in the operating state in the time shortening state, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and as a result, the second game area is entered. It is determined that a game ball should be fired.

  Here, since the variable start winning device is arranged in the second game area, when the variable start winning apparatus is in an operating state in a time-saving state, it is necessary to fire a game ball in the second game area. is there.

  On the other hand, the variable start winning device is inoperative in any state during the display of the variation of the first symbol and the stop display of the first symbol, so the game ball is launched into the second game area. There seems to be no need to do. However, in the time shortening state, the variation time of the first symbol is often set as an extremely short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds), and game ball launching is started from the variation display of the first symbol. Otherwise, the game ball cannot be entered when the variable start winning device is activated.

  In other words, it may be assumed that if the game ball is fired after the variable start winning device is activated, the variable start winning device cannot be released in time. Therefore, in the present solution means, not only the condition that the variable start winning device is in the operating state but also the condition that the first symbol is in the variable display or the stop display. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the launch of the game ball is delayed and the variable start winning device cannot be released in time.

  As described above, in the present solution means, as the predetermined condition relating to the launch position of the game ball, the condition that the first symbol is in the variable display state, the stop display state, and the variable start winning device is in the operating state in the time reduction state is defined. Therefore, it is possible to specify an appropriate launch position for the variable start winning device in the time shortening state.

  Solving means 6: The gaming machine of the present solving means is that in the solving means 5, the launch position designation condition defining means is configured such that the variable start winning device returns from the open state to the closed state in the time shortening state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the condition that it is in the middle of an end time corresponding to a time until the start of variation of one symbol is allowed is excluded from the predetermined condition.

In the solution described above, the condition that the variable start winning device is in an operating state in a time shortening state is defined as a predetermined condition relating to the launch position of the game ball. The condition that the variable start winning device is in the middle of the end time (during the end time) corresponding to the time until the start of the variation of the first symbol after the return from the open state to the closed state is allowed is a predetermined condition. It is excluded and prescribed.
For this reason, even if the variable start prize-winning device is in the operating state in the time shortening state, if it is during the end time, it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and as a result, the game ball is launched into the first game area. Determined to be.

Here, since the opening of the variable start winning device has already ended during the end time of the variable start winning device, even if the game ball is fired into the second game area, the game ball enters the variable start winning device. There is no need to fire a game ball in the second game area.
Therefore, in the present solution means, it is possible to designate an appropriate firing position for the variable start winning device by excluding the condition that the variable start winning device is in the end time from the predetermined condition regarding the launch position of the game ball.

  Solution 7: The gaming machine of the present solution is the solution 5 or 6, wherein the launch position designation condition defining means is selected when the first symbol is variably displayed in the time reduction state. The gaming machine is characterized by including both the variation of the first symbol and the variation of the first symbol at the time of non-winning.

  In the present solution, the condition that the first symbol is being displayed in a time-reduced state includes both the variation of the first symbol when winning and the variation of the first symbol when not winning. That is, if the first symbol is being displayed in the time-reduced state, it is determined that the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner regardless of whether it is a winning change or a non-winning change.

  Here, first, the fluctuation at the time of winning will be explained. Since the time is shortened, the fluctuation of the first symbol is finished in an extremely short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds), and the first symbol is stopped depending on the winning mode. Will be displayed. When the display stop time of the first symbol elapses, the variable start winning device is activated. Therefore, if a game ball is being fired into the second game area during the variation of the first symbol, the variable start winning device is Can smoothly enter the game ball.

  On the other hand, in the case of fluctuation at the time of non-winning, because the time is shortened, the fluctuation of the first symbol is completed in a short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds), but the first symbol is stopped by the non-winning manner Will be displayed. And even if the stop display time of the 1st symbol passes, the variable start winning device does not become an operation state, and if the memory of the 1st symbol exists, the change of the next 1st symbol is started. It will be. In this case, since the variable start winning device does not shift to the operating state, it is not possible to enter the game ball into the variable start winning device.

  For this reason, in the case of a change at the time of non-winning, it is possible to determine not to fire a game ball in the second game area in a state where the first symbol is changing. However, if such a control is performed, it will be known in advance that the change in the 1st symbol is a non-winning change from the change in the 1st symbol (so-called first ballet), and unintended technical intervention will occur. There is a risk of encouragement.

  Therefore, in the present solution, the condition that the first symbol is being displayed in a time-reduced state includes both the variation of the first symbol when winning and the variation of the first symbol when not winning. Thus, unintended technical intervention can be eliminated to ensure the fairness of the game.

  Solving means 8: The gaming machine of the present solving means in any one of the solving means 1 to 7, a determination content storage means for storing the determination content by the launch position determination means, and a determination stored in the determination content storage means Based on the contents, a first display of a mode for prompting that a game ball should be launched in the first game area or a mode for prompting that a game ball should be launched in the second game area A gaming machine further comprising launch position designation display means for performing two displays.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) The contents determined by the launch position determining means are stored. For example, when it is determined by the launch position determining means that a game ball should be launched into the first game area, information that the game ball should be launched into the first game area is stored (launch position designation flag). “00H” is stored). On the other hand, when it is determined by the launch position determining means that a game ball should be launched into the second game area, information that the game ball should be launched into the second game area is stored (launch position designation flag). Is stored with “03H”).

(2) Based on the contents of determination stored in (1) above, a first display (light-off display) in a mode that prompts the player to launch a game ball in the first game area is performed, or the second game A second display (lighting display) of a mode for prompting that a game ball should be launched into the area is performed. For example, when information indicating that a game ball should be fired in the first game area is stored, a first display for turning off a predetermined lamp should be performed, and a game ball should be fired in the second game area. Is stored, the second display for lighting a predetermined lamp is performed.

  Thus, according to the present solution means, the determination content by the firing position determination means is stored, and the firing position designation display (lamp display) is executed based on the stored determination content. It can be displayed appropriately in a form directly linked to actual profit.

  Solution 9: The gaming machine of the present solution controls, in any of the solutions 1 to 7, the main control device that controls the progress of the game and the content of the effect based on the notification of information from the main control device. An effect control device, a determination content storage unit that is provided in the main control device and stores the determination content by the launch position determination unit, and a determination content that is provided in the main control device and is stored in the determination content storage unit Launch position designation information notifying means for notifying the production control device of the launch position designation information, and provided in the production control device, based on the launch position designation information notified by the launch position designation information notification means, Performing a first effect in a mode for prompting that a game ball should be launched into the first game region or a second effect in a mode for prompting that a game ball should be launched in the second game region A gaming machine and further comprising a firing position specified demonstration execution means for executing the firing position specifying directed by Ukoto.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) The progress of the game is controlled by the main controller. The main control device is a device that is the center of the control operation, and controls the overall operation of the gaming machine.
(2) The content of the effect is controlled by the effect control device based on the notification of the information (command) from the main control device in (1) above. The effect control device is a device that controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the gaming machine, and takes charge of the control regarding the contents of the effect.

(3) The main control device of (1) stores the contents determined by the launch position determining means. For example, when it is determined by the launch position determining means that a game ball should be launched into the first game area, the main control device of (1) should launch a game ball into the first game area. Information is stored ("00H" is stored in the launch position designation flag). On the other hand, when it is determined by the launch position determining means that a game ball should be launched into the second game area, the main controller of (1) should launch a game ball into the second game area. Information is stored ("03H" is stored in the launch position designation flag).

(4) The main control device in (1) notifies the production control device in (2) of the firing position designation information (launch position designation command) regarding the determination content stored in (3). For example, if information that game balls should be launched in the first game area is stored, the main control device should launch game balls in the first game region to the effect control device Is notified of the launch position designation information with the contents indicating. In addition, when information that game balls should be launched in the second game area is stored, the main control device should launch game balls in the second game region with respect to the effect control device. Is notified of the launch position designation information with the contents indicating. By this notification, the effect control device can confirm to which game area the main control device has determined that the game ball should be launched.

(5) The first effect of the aspect in which the effect control device of (2) urges that a game ball should be launched into the first game area based on the launch position designation information notified by (4). Or a second effect in a form that prompts the player to launch a game ball in the second game area. For example, the production control device (2) performs the first production (the production that suggests left-handed) when the launch position designation information indicates that the game ball should be launched into the first game area. Then, when the launch position designation information indicates that the game ball should be launched into the second game area, the second effect (effect suggesting a right-handed strike) is executed.

  However, the production control device of (2) does not always execute the first production when the launch position designation information indicates that the game ball should be launched into the first game area, The first effect may be executed in a necessary scene in light of the effect content. Similarly, the effect control device of (2) above does not always execute the second effect when the launch position designation information indicates that the game ball should be launched into the second game area. The second effect may be executed in a necessary scene in light of the game content and the effect content.

  Thus, according to this solution means, the determination content by the firing position determination means is stored, and the stored determination content is transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device by the firing position designation information (launch position designation command). Notify. In the production control device, since the launch position designation effect (production on the liquid crystal screen) is executed based on the notified launch position designation information, the launch position designation effect is also appropriately executed in a form directly linked to the actual profit. can do.

  Solving means 10: The gaming machine of the present solving means is that in the solving means 9, the firing position designation information notifying means fires a game ball in the first game area according to the decision content stored in the decision content storing means. The content indicating that it should be changed to the content indicating that the game ball should be launched into the second game area, or that the game ball should be launched into the second game area The gaming machine is characterized in that the launch position designation information is notified when the content changes to the content indicating that a game ball should be launched into the first game area.

In the gaming machine of the present solution, the stored determination content indicates that the game ball should be launched into the second game area from the content indicating that the game ball should be launched into the first game area. Launch position when changed to content, or changed from content indicating that a game ball should be fired to the second game area to content indicating that a game ball should be fired to the first game area The specified information is notified.
That is, in the present solution, the firing position designation information is only displayed when the stored content changes from “left-handed” to “right-handed”, or when it changes from “right-handed” to “left-handed”. Be notified.

  Thus, in this solution, in order to notify the launch position designation information only when the launch position designation direction has changed, the main controller on the side that sends the launch position designation information, or the launch position designation information It is possible to synergistically reduce the communication burden on both of the receiving side production control devices.

  Solving means 11: The gaming machine of the present solving means in any of the solving means 1 to 7, a determination content storage means for storing the determination content by the launch position determination means, and a determination stored in the determination content storage means Based on the content, an external signal having a content indicating that a game ball should be fired in the first game area or generating a game ball in the second game area is external. A gaming machine further comprising: an external signal generating means for generating a signal; and an external signal transmitting means for transmitting the external signal generated by the external signal generating means to an external device.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) The contents determined by the launch position determining means are stored. For example, when it is determined by the launch position determining means that a game ball should be launched into the first game area, information that the game ball should be launched into the first game area is stored (launch position designation flag). “00H” is stored). On the other hand, when it is determined by the launch position determining means that a game ball should be launched into the second game area, information that the game ball should be launched into the second game area is stored (launch position designation flag). Is stored with “03H”).

(2) Based on the determination content stored in (1) above, an external signal having a content indicating that a game ball should be fired in the first game area is generated, or a game ball is displayed in the second game area. Is generated to indicate that it should be fired. For example, when information indicating that a game ball should be fired in the first game area, the external signal is set to “OFF”, and information indicating that a game ball should be fired in the second game area is stored. If it is, the external signal is turned “ON”.

(3) Then, the external signal generated by the above (2) is transmitted to the external device. The external device is, for example, a device for testing a gaming machine.

  As described above, according to the present solution means, the determination content by the launch position determination means is stored, and the external signal (test signal) is generated based on the stored determination content. It is possible to control appropriately in a form directly connected to.

  Solving means 12: The gaming machine of the present solving means, in the solving means 11, when the time shortening state transition means shifts to the time shortening state, the lottery result obtained in the second stage lottery is used as the first stage lottery. The second-stage lottery result limiting means for limiting the lottery result to apply the specific condition to the second-stage lottery execution means and the second-stage lottery execution means each time the winning result is obtained, A limit number setting means for setting a limit number of times by which the two-stage lottery result limiting means can limit the lottery result obtained in the second stage lottery, and the limit number set by the limit number setting means becomes a specified value. If the winning result is obtained in the second stage lottery by the second stage lottery execution means without reaching the special game by the variable winning device, the non-time shortening from the time shortened state is performed. The time reduction state is continued by interposing the special game by the variable winning device between the non-time shortening state and the time shortening state after the special game by the variable winning device is completed. When the limit number set by the time shortening state continuation means and the limit number setting means reaches a prescribed value, the restriction on the lottery result obtained by the second stage lottery by the second stage lottery result restriction means is canceled. The second stage lottery result restriction releasing means and the second stage lottery result restriction releasing means cancel the lottery result restriction. If a lottery result indicating that it does not apply is obtained, the variable prize is returned from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state before the execution of the special game by the variable winning device. A non-time-reduced state return means for returning from the time-reduced state to the non-time-reduced state by maintaining the non-time-reduced state after the end of the special game by setting, and the limit number of times before the specified value If the limit number has not been reset by the limit number setting means, and the limit number of times has reached the value immediately before the specified value, the variable winning device is activated. To the start of the operation of the variable winning device when the limit number reaches a specified value, a special launch that determines that a game ball should be launched into the second game area under a special situation A position determination unit, wherein the determination content storage unit stores the determination content by the launch position determination unit and the determination content by the special launch position determination unit, and the external signal includes the first external signal and the A second external signal different from the first external signal, wherein the external signal generation means indicates that the determination content stored in the determination content storage means should launch a game ball in the first game area. In the case of the content shown, the first external signal and the second external signal having the content indicating that a game ball should be launched into the first game area are generated and stored in the determination content storage means. If the determined content is a content indicating that a game ball should be launched into the second game area, the first external content indicating that a game ball should be launched into the second game area A determination signal stored in the determination content storage means, and a content indicating that the game ball should be launched into the second game area under the special situation; If there is a game ball in the second game area Generating the first external signal having a content indicating that it should be fired and the second external signal having a content indicating that a game ball should be fired in the first game area; Is a gaming machine characterized by transmitting the first external signal and the second external signal generated by the external signal generating means to an external device.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) When shifting to the “time reduction state”, the lottery result obtained by the “second stage lottery” is limited to the lottery result indicating that “specific conditions are applied to the first stage lottery”.
(2) For this reason, once a transition is made to the “time reduction state”, the lottery result of the “second stage lottery” is basically limited to “specific conditions are applied to the first stage lottery”. If the “second stage lottery” is repeatedly executed during this period, the “restricted number” is set every time. This “restricted number” defines how many times the “second stage lottery” lottery result can be restricted during the “time reduction state”. The “limit number” can be set, for example, by subtracting from the initially set value. If a predetermined reset condition is satisfied during the subtraction process, the “limit number” is reset to the first value. It can also be returned to a value. In addition, the “restricted number” can be controlled by an addition process. For example, a predetermined initial value (for example, “0”) is set in the “restricted number” at the first stage, and the “restricted number” is added every time a winning result is obtained in the “second stage lottery”. Then, when the “restriction count” reaches a predetermined maximum value (for example, “18”), it can be determined that further limitation is impossible.

(3) Here, if the winning result is obtained in the second stage lottery in a state where the number of times set in (2) does not reach the specified value, a special game by the variable winning device is sandwiched between them. The time saving state continues.

(4) While the “second stage lottery” is repeated, when the “limit number” set in the above (2) reaches a specified value (for example, 0), the limit is released. It becomes impossible to continue limiting the lottery result of “two-stage lottery”.

(5) As a result, when a lottery result indicating that “the specific condition is not applied to the first stage lottery” is obtained in the “second stage lottery”, the “time reduction state” is changed to the “non-time reduction state”. Return. Note that returning from the “time shortening state” to the “non-time shortening state” means that if the time is in the “time shortening state” before the opening operation by the variable winning device is started, before the opening operation by the variable winning device is started. This is a state in which the state is shifted to the “non-time shortened state” and the “non-time shortened state” is maintained after the opening operation by the variable winning device is completed.

(6) Then, the number of times before the limit number is “1” (“0” if the method for controlling the number of restrictions is a subtraction method and “18” if the method for controlling the number of times is an addition method) ( If the subtraction method has reached “1” and the addition method has reached “17”), and the limit number has not been reset (for example, the winning type of the special symbol corresponds to the probability variation symbol), There is a special situation between the end of operation of the variable prize device when the limit number reaches the value before the specified value and the start of operation of the variable prize device when the limit number reaches the specified value. It is determined that the game ball should be launched into the second game area (when the limiter is activated) (special launch position determining means).

(7) The contents determined by the launch position determining means and the contents determined by the special launch position determining means (6) are stored (determination content storing means).
For example, when it is determined by the launch position determining means that a game ball should be launched into the first game area, information that the game ball should be launched into the first game area is stored (launch position designation flag). “00H” is stored).
Further, when it is determined by the launch position determining means that the game ball should be launched into the second game area, information that the game ball should be launched into the second game area is stored (launch position designation flag). Is stored with “03H”).
Further, when it is determined by the special launch position determining means of (6) above that the game ball should be launched into the second game area under a special situation, the game is entered into the second game area under a special situation. Information that the ball should be fired is stored ("01H" is stored in the launch position designation flag).

(8) The external signal includes a first external signal (launch position designation signal 1) and a second external signal (launch position designation signal 2).

(9) When the determination content stored in the determination content storage means of (7) is content (00H) indicating that a game ball should be launched into the first game region, the first game region A first external signal and a second external signal having contents indicating that the game ball should be fired are generated.

  In addition, when the decision content stored in the decision content storage means of (7) is content (03H) indicating that a game ball should be launched into the second game area, the game is entered in the second game area. A first external signal and a second external signal are generated that indicate that the sphere should be fired.

  Furthermore, when the determination content stored in the determination content storage means of (7) is content (01H) indicating that a game ball should be launched into the second game area under a special situation A first external signal with content indicating that a game ball should be fired in the second game area and a second external signal with content indicating that a game ball should be fired in the first game area are generated. .

(10) Then, the first external signal and the second external signal generated by the above (9) are transmitted to the external device.

  In this solution, the concept of “limit number” is used for the end condition for ending the time reduction state, and when the “limit number” set in (2) reaches a specified value (for example, 0). Since the restriction is canceled and the lottery result of the “second stage lottery” cannot be restricted any more, the state is returned to the “non-time-reduced state” by (5) above. When returning to the “non-time reduction state” by (5) above, the probability of winning in the “first stage lottery” is returned to the normal probability, so the frequency of winning in the “first stage lottery” is the original The hurdle until the operation by the variable start winning device is performed is returned to the initial state.

  In this way, during the game, first the “first stage lottery” is won and then the “second stage lottery” is performed, where a lottery result indicating that “specific conditions are applied to the first stage lottery” is obtained. In such a case, the “time-reduced state” continues in the subsequent game, and during this time, the opening operation of the variable start winning device, the opening operation of the variable winning device, and the provision of privileges associated with these operations (for example, game balls) The game ball payout process for the incoming ball is repeatedly performed. Thereby, during the “time reduction state”, it is possible to generate a loop of an operation related to the provision of a privilege such as operation of various winning devices, and to realize continuity of profits to the player.

  Then, on the premise of such game contents, the present solution means stores the determination contents by the launch position determination means and the special launch position determination means, and the first external signal and the second external signal based on the stored determination contents Since the signal is generated, it is possible to appropriately control the first external signal and the second external signal in a form directly linked to actual benefits.

  Further, in the present solution, in a special situation (when the limiter is activated), even when it is determined that the game ball should be launched into the second game area, the game ball is launched into the first game area. Since the second external signal indicating that it should be generated can be generated, it is possible to generate an external signal that meets the needs of the external device (for example, information necessary for the test).

According to the present invention, it is possible to earnestly determine suitable firing position of Yu technique sphere.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a security management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a normal symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol change pre-process. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of a hit time fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable start prize-winning apparatus management process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a normal symbol operation condition setting table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a prize ball payout process. It is a table | surface which shows the list of the right-handed conditions used by the launch position designation flag management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a launch position designation flag management process. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the detail of a launch position designation | designated flag. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a test signal process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a status display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a launch position designation | designated display lamp management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a game flow figure which shows the flow of the game by a pachinko machine as an example. FIG. 49 is a game flow diagram showing a game flow when the “limiter count” reaches the remaining zero. It is a conceptual diagram which classify | categorizes and shows the pattern of a game flow. It is a conceptual diagram which classify | categorizes and shows the pattern of a game flow. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the progress situation of the game corresponding to the normal symbol at the time of the normal symbol first hit. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the progress of the game corresponding to a special symbol when the result of winning is obtained by the special symbol lottery at the time of normal symbol first hit. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the progress of the game corresponding to a special symbol when the result of non-winning is obtained by the special symbol lottery at the time of normal symbol first hit. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the progress situation of the game corresponding to the normal symbol before limiter arrival in the situation where the memory of the normal symbol exists. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the progress state of the game corresponding to the normal symbol before limiter arrival in the situation where the memory of the normal symbol does not exist. It is a timing chart when the result of a probable variation symbol winning is obtained in the special symbol lottery one time before the limiter is reached in a situation where there is no normal symbol memory. It is a timing chart when the result of a normal symbol winning is obtained in the special symbol lottery one time before the limiter arrival in a situation where there is no normal symbol memory. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the progress state of the game corresponding to a special symbol when it corresponds to a symbol with a short time in the special symbol lottery when reaching the limiter. It is a timing chart which shows the temporal change of the progress situation of the game corresponding to a special symbol when it corresponds to a symbol without time in the special symbol lottery at the time of reaching the limiter. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the state of the launch position designation | designated signal with the pattern of a game flow. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect performed at the time of normal symbol non-winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of a pseudo effect design. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the production | presentation design of a normal design, the 4th design of a normal design, and the production design of a special design. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of a normal symbol hit or at the time of non-winning (1/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of a normal symbol hit or a non-winning (2/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of normal symbol hitting or non-winning (3/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of an effect performed at the time of a normal symbol hit or a non-winning (4/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of an effect performed at the time of a normal symbol hit or a non-winning (5/5). It is a figure which shows the example of an effect performed at the time of variable start prize-winning apparatus action | operation. It is a continuation figure (1/2) which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of special symbol change (within change time). It is a continuation figure (2/2) which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of special symbol change (within change time). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production performed at the time of special symbol change when not entering the chance zone. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect performed when a game flow progresses during a probability change from variable winning apparatus operation. It is a continuation figure for demonstrating the detail of a launch position designation | designated effect and a payout effect (1/6). It is a continuation figure for demonstrating the detail of a launch position designation | designated effect and a payout effect (2/6). It is a continuation figure for demonstrating the detail of a launch position designation | designated effect and a payout effect (3/6). It is a continuation figure for demonstrating the detail of a launch position designation | designated effect and a payout effect (4/6). It is a continuation figure for demonstrating the detail of a launch position designation | designated effect and a payout effect (5/6). It is a continuation figure for demonstrating the detail of a launch position designation | designated effect and a payout effect (6/6). It is a figure which shows the example of an effect performed when the limiter addition by the normal win during probability change generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect performed after reaching a limiter. It is the figure which showed the example of the background image which changes with progress of a game flow. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect performed when it does not re-enter into a chance zone after reaching a limiter (when returning during a normal game). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a launch position designation | designated production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the hit simulation effect design variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the aftereffects management process of a normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation process after a big character start. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a point production management process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174, and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launching device, ball launching means). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. Further, the game area 8a includes a left-handed area (first game area) and a right-handed area (second game area). A game ball can be thrown towards it. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, and the like are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference symbol).

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or for example, while the symbol (ordinary symbol or special symbol) is changing, Various effects (notice effect, expectation suggestion effect, etc.) can be generated in accordance with various situations such as a fixed display per normal symbol and a game in a high probability state.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 5).

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Configuration of the board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. Further, in the game area 8a, there are a middle start gate 20 (first start gate), a right start gate 21 (second start gate), a normal winning opening (winning device) 22, 24, 25 around the effect unit 40. The variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30 and the like are distributed and installed. Among these, the middle start gate 20 is located in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a, and the right start gate 21 is located near the upper part in the right part of the game area 8a. In addition, the three normal winning holes 22 are positioned on the lower side of the left side of the game area 8a, and the other one normal winning hole 24 is positioned below the middle start gate 20. The remaining ordinary winning opening 25 is located on the right side of the game area 8a, and is located below the right start gate 21, and the variable winning device 30 is arranged directly below the right starting gate 21. The variable start winning device 28 is located on the lower side of the right side of the game area 8a and is arranged side by side to the right of the middle start gate 20. For this reason, the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 are arranged at positions where it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the left-handed region to enter and where the game ball flowing down the right-handed region can enter. Will be.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the middle start gate 20 and the right start gate 21 in the process of flowing down, enters the normal winning holes 22, 24, 25 (wins), or The player enters (wins) a ball in the variable start winning device 28 during operation or the variable winning device 30 during opening operation. Note that the game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8a may pass through the middle start gate 20 or may enter the normal winning holes 22 and 24 (win). The game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the right start gate 21, enter the normal winning opening 25 (win), or operate the variable start winning device 28 and the opening operation. There is a possibility of winning (winning) a ball in the variable winning device 30 at the time. The game balls that have passed through the middle start gate 20 and the right start gate 21 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but enter the normal winning holes 22, 24, 25, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30 (winning) The collected game balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. It is possible to enter the winning (winning) into the start winning opening 28a (ordinary electric accessory, variable entering means). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, one open / close member 28b, and this open / close member 28b reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the start winning opening 28a (the starting winning opening 28a is closed). When the variable start winning device 28 is actuated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge as a hinge, thereby opening the start winning port 28a (open state). During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible, that is, in an open state in which it is possible to enter a ball, and can generate an event (lottery opportunity) of winning in the start winning port 28a (variable winning). means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 28a. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a during operation). However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable start winning device 28 at the time of operation, but the flow is generated randomly.

  In addition, the variable winning device 30 described above operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed for a prescribed stop display time in a mode other than non-winning), and enters the special winning opening 30b. Make it possible to enter the ball (winning) (special electric accessory, special game execution means). The variable winning device 30 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 30a, and these opening / closing members 30a also reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 3, the left and right opening / closing members 30a are in the closed position with their tips facing upwards, and at this time, it is impossible to enter (win) the big winning opening 30b (game). (There is no gap through which the sphere can flow). On the other hand, when the variable winning device 30 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 30a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is enlarged to the left and right to open the large winning opening 30b. During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state in which game balls can flow in, and can generate a winning (winning) to the big winning opening 30b (variable winning means). Here, similarly, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable winning device 30 (the large winning opening 30b at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable winning device 30 (large winning port 30b) at the time of the opening operation, and the inflow is generated randomly.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the game areas 8a including the game balls that have entered the normal winning holes 22, 24, 25, the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a), and the variable winning device 30 (large winning port 30b) are driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower right position in the window 4a, and a special symbol display device 34 and a game state display device 38. ing. Of these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to variably display the normal symbol, and stops and displays the normal symbol when the lamp is turned on or off (symbol display means, first symbol). Display means). The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  Further, the special symbol display device 34 can display the variation state and the stopped state of the special symbol by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, second symbol display means). Since one special symbol is used in this embodiment, it is sufficient to provide one 7-segment LED as the special symbol display device 34. However, as shown in FIG. By mounting, the same hardware configuration (integrated display substrate 89) can be applied to other models using two special symbols. In the present embodiment, the working memory lamp and the working memory number display device corresponding to the special symbol are not provided. One special symbol may be displayed by two 7-segment LEDs. In addition, the special symbol display device 34 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  The game state display device 38 includes, for example, three LEDs respectively corresponding to a high probability state display lamp 38c, a time-short state display lamp 38d, and a launch position designation display lamp 38e (launch position designation display means). In FIG. 4, other lamps (LEDs) not particularly denoted by reference numerals are unused (blank). In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the special symbol display device 34, and the game state display device 38 described above are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state where they are mounted on one integrated display board 89. It is attached.

[Other configuration of game board unit: see FIG. 3]
The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, 40m, and the like inside. The decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, and 40m improve the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling and, for example, emit transmitted light by a built-in light emitter (LED or the like), thereby performing a stunning operation. can do. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display, effect display means) is installed inside the effect unit 40. The liquid crystal display 42 includes various effect images including effect symbols corresponding to normal symbols. Is displayed. In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40.

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The rolling stage 40e is formed, for example, in two upper and lower stages, of which the upper stage is located at the back as viewed from the player and the lower stage is located at the front as viewed from the player. In both the upper and lower stages, the upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that rolls on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down from the lower stage into the lower game area 8a.

  An inflow passage 40g is formed at a substantially central position of the rolling stage 40e, and game balls can randomly flow into the inflow passage 40g from the upper rolling stage 40e. The inflow passage 40g is formed by extending the lower edge portion of the effect unit 40 downward and then bent in an L shape toward the front side, and a ball discharge port 40h is formed at the end thereof. The ball discharge port 40h is opened toward the front surface, and the opening position is located directly above the middle start gate 20. For this reason, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow passage 40g from above the rolling stage 40e is released from the ball discharge port 40h and easily passes through the middle start gate 20 directly below it (however, it does not always pass). .)

  In addition, the effect unit 40 is provided with a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, and the like) (not shown) together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped ornament) for effect. The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to such an effect using the movable body 40f, an appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image can be exhibited. A production example using the movable body 40f will be described later.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The middle start gate 20 and the right start gate 21 described above are integrally provided with a middle gate switch 78 and a right gate switch 80 for detecting the passage of a game ball, respectively. The game board unit 8 is provided with a start winning port switch 82 (detection means) and a count switch 84 (detection means) corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. Among these, the start winning port switch 82 is for detecting a winning of a game ball to the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a). The count switch 84 is for detecting a winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening 30b) and counting the number. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning port switch 86 for detecting a winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22, 24, 25. In addition, a common winning opening switch 86 may be used for all the normal winning openings 22, 24, 25, or a separate winning opening switch 86 may be provided for each of the normal winning openings 22, 24, 25. Good. For example, separate winning port switches 86 are installed on the left and right and center of the board, respectively, and the left winning port switch 86 detects the winning of a game ball with respect to the normal winning port 22 located on the left side of the board, and the center winning port switch In 86, the winning of the game ball to the normal winning port 24 located in the center of the board surface is detected, and in the right winning port switch 86, the winning of the game ball to the normal winning port 25 located on the right side of the board is detected. Good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Note that due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the middle gate switch 78, the right gate switch 80, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87. Has become. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The display operation of the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the special symbol display device 34, and the game state display device 38 described above is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, and 38 and the lamp 33a in accordance with the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, and 38 and the lamp 33a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on the single integrated display substrate 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a large prize opening solenoid (special electric accessory solenoid) 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to operate (open) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  Although not particularly illustrated, the game board unit 8 is also provided with a magnetic sensor and a vibration sensor. Among these sensors, the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic flux flying to the game board unit 8 at the installation position, and the density thereof. A detection signal corresponding to (magnetic intensity) is output. The vibration sensor detects an acceleration (vibration) applied to the game board unit 8 at the installation position, and outputs a detection signal corresponding to the magnitude. The detection signals of these magnetic sensors and vibration sensors are input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) through the panel relay terminal board 87, for example.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. When the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. In addition, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal thereof. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The effect control CPU 126 can be of a type that is faster (high clock frequency) than the main control CPU 72 and has a wide data bus width (for example, 64 bits). The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives a command to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134, and various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 and the board surface. Processing is performed to cause the lamp 53 to emit light or to actually output sound effects, voices, or the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output. .

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame lighting board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 pass through the glass frame lighting board 136 and various lamps 46. , 48, 50, 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration board 136, and when the player pushes or rotates the effect switching button 45, a contact signal (at the time of the pushing operation) or a rotation angle signal, respectively. (During rotation operation) is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame lighting board 136.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body solenoid 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body solenoid 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body solenoid 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. When an LED array is used for the backlight, an LED drive board (not shown) can be installed instead of the inverter board 158. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using the various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55, and 56, and the movable body 40f as described above, and the production by the image display using the liquid crystal display 42. Control is included. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and each pixel (for example, 24-bit color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data. ) Individually.

Here, the image ROM 154 (image storage means) stores in advance a plurality of images for effects (an image of effect symbols, a big hit image, a background image, etc.) and is used for a launch position designation effect described later. An image (an image for left-handed production or an image for right-handed production) is stored as an image independent of other production images.
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the image used for the launch position designation effect (the image for left-handed effect or the image for right-handed effect) is stored as an image independent of other images for effect. Therefore, there is no need to incorporate a left-handed or right-handed image into the big hit image or the like, and as a result, the image capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated therefrom (for example). Power control means). The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a command for returning to the effect control device 124 (for example, a model designation command, a time shortening state designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a normal symbol operation memory count command, a remaining number cut counter remaining number). Command, special gaming state designation command, launch position designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, the effect state corresponding to the time reduction state, the effect state corresponding to the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, and the operation It is possible to restore the stored number of effect display modes, sound output contents, light emission states of various lamps, etc. (game state return means).

  Here, the launch position designation command is generated based on the back-up launch position status value. Specifically, when the value of the firing position status is a value (0) indicating left-handed, the main control CPU 72 generates a firing position designation command indicating left-handed. On the other hand, when the value of the launch position status is a value (1) indicating a right strike, the main control CPU 72 generates a launch position designation command indicating a right strike.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, Time reduction function operation / non-operation state, jackpot gaming state / non-hit gaming state, operation memory content, various flag states, random number update state, etc.) are restored (game state return means). Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 7 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in supply voltage). When the power cut-off occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffers corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special winning opening solenoid 90, and the whole of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. Back up the contents and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, a winning symbol random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach group) excluding a bonus symbol random number (hardware random number) corresponding to a special symbol and a winning symbol random (hardware random number) corresponding to a normal symbol. (Determined random number, reach mode determined random number, variation pattern determined random number, etc.) are generated on the program. Note that the reach group determination random number and the reach mode determination random number corresponding to the special symbol can be generated as necessary, and if not used, the random number generation process can be omitted. In any case, these software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 8), but each time the random number value makes one round in this process, the loop counter The initial value (not all random numbers need to be targeted) is changed. The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 8), and therefore overlap (conflict) ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 8). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the random number counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers determined, and the like.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the detection signal from the middle gate switch 78 and the right gate switch 80 and the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the start winning port switch 82, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86 are read. .

  Step S204: Here, the main control CPU 72 executes a security management process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not to treat the ball as valid based on the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal read in the previous input processing (step S203) (the winning is valid). Whether or not there is) is determined (winning validity determination means). When the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning is valid, the main control CPU 72 retains a winning detection signal. However, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning is invalid, the main control CPU 72 generates an illegal winning error command or due to an illegal winning. The bit of the winning detection signal is rewritten from ON to OFF. Further, in the security management process, the main control CPU 72 monitors fraudulent acts by the above magnetic sensor and vibration sensor (not shown), or excessive winning or passing through the middle start gate 20 or the right start gate 21 is detected. Whether or not it has occurred is determined. The details of the security management process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S205: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, events that occurred during the game based on the passage detection signal from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80 and the winning detection signal from the start winning opening switch 82 And further processing is executed in accordance with each event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as an internal lottery trigger (lottery trigger) corresponding to the special symbol has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. The processing executed when the passage detection signal is input from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80 and the processing executed when the winning detection signal is input from the start winning port switch 82 are further different. This will be described later with reference to the flowchart.

  Step S206, Step S207: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among these, in the special symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol described above, controls the variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 34, The operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S207), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the middle start gate 20 or the right start gate 21 in the previous switch input event process (step S205). In the normal symbol game process, a random number value is read from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means, lottery execution means, first stage lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (lottery trigger generation operation means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display. The details of the normal symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 82, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the number of prize balls is output to the payout control device 92. Then, a prize ball content command for transmitting the contents of the number of prize balls is output to the effect control device 124 (winning privilege granting means). The details of the prize ball payout processing will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S209: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be tabulated and managed (however, in this embodiment, the small hit is not used). Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209a: The main control CPU 72 executes a launch position designation flag management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the launch position of the game ball in accordance with the progress of the game (launch position determining means). Details of specific processing will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S210: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing (external signal generation means, external signal transmission means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70. Details of specific processing will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S211: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting state of the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the special symbol display device 34, the game state display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S206) or the normal symbol game process (step S207). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S209) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer to the port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S214: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) of step S206 to step S213 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated and executed in the main loop of the CPU. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S215: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S216, Step S217: The main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Security management processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the security management process executed in the interrupt management process. The contents of the security management process will be described below along with an example procedure.

  Step S220: First, the main control CPU 72 executes a winning validity determination process. In this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the winning is valid for the case where the input state of the winning detection signal read in the previous input process is “ON” (winning validity determining means). The validity determination is made for each of the start winning opening 28a and the big winning opening 30b.

[Significance of “entering ball” and “winning”]
Here, the meaning of “entering ball” and “winning” in the present embodiment will be described.
With respect to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, each “open ball” means that the game ball flows into the start winning port 28a or the big winning port 30b in an open state.

  When the game ball that has entered the ball passes through the through hole (detection unit) of the start winning opening switch 82 or the count switch 84, the winning detection signal of each switch 82, 84 is turned "ON", and the starting winning opening 28a or large This means that “entering ball” into the winning opening 30b is detected.

  However, some detected “entrance balls” are not appropriate. As an example in which the detected “pitch” is not appropriate, there is a case where a game ball flows into the variable start winning device 28 or the variable winning device 30 by some unauthorized means. For this reason, in the winning validity determination process (step S220), it is determined whether or not the detected “entering ball” is treated as effective for security.

  Then, when the main control CPU 72 determines in the winning validity determination process that the “winning” is treated as valid, the “winning” is generated for the first time, and the winning detection signals of the switches 82 and 84 are the following. It is still used as effective in the control process. On the other hand, if “entry” is detected, but the main control CPU 72 determines that the “entry” is not treated as valid (invalid), no “winning” has occurred in the first place. . In this case, the winning detection signals of the switches 82 and 84 are invalidated and are not used for subsequent control processing (lottery or prize ball processing).

  In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, “determining that the detected“ pick ”” is treated as valid ”in the winning validity determination process is also expressed as“ determining that the winning is valid ”, and“ detected “ “Determining that“ entering ball ”is not treated as valid” is also expressed as “determining that the winning is invalid (invalid)”.

[Judgment conditions]
In the winning validity determination process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the following conditions.

[Effectiveness determination for the start winning award 28a]
(1) To the start winning port 28a detected during a series of operations related to the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) and during a period other than a period until a predetermined time (for example, about 4 seconds at the longest) elapses after the operation ends. It ’s not a ball.

[Validity determination for the big prize opening 30b]
(2) Entering the prize winning opening 30b detected during a series of operations related to the variable prize winning device 30 (special electric accessory) and during a period other than a period until a predetermined time (for example, about 15 seconds) elapses after the operation ends. Not a sphere.

  In the determination using the above condition (1), for example, the value of the normal game management status and the values of various winning valid timers are obtained in the interruption period in which the winning detection signal (ON) from the start winning opening switch 82 is input. Can be done with reference. When the condition (1) is satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the “winning” to the start winning opening 28a is treated as valid, and the winning detection signal from the start winning opening switch 82 is also valid in the subsequent control processing. Used for. On the other hand, when the condition (1) is not satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the ball entering the start winning port 28a is not treated as valid, and performs a process of invalidating the winning detection signal from the start winning port switch 82. Do. The normal game management status is internal information that is set on the control by the main control CPU 72 in accordance with the progress of the game corresponding to the normal symbol. Also, the value of the winning valid timer is set in consideration of the stagnation of the game ball (so-called ball biting) after the closing time of the variable start winning device 28 has elapsed (eg, about 2 to 4 seconds).

  The determination using the condition (2) is performed with reference to the value of the special game management status or the value of the winning valid timer in the interruption cycle in which the winning detection signal (ON) from the count switch 84 is input, for example. be able to. When the condition (2) is satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the “winning” to the big winning opening 30b is treated as valid and effectively uses the winning detection signal from the count switch 84 in the subsequent control processing. To do. On the other hand, when the condition (2) is not satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning ball 30b is not treated as valid and performs a process of invalidating the winning detection signal from the count switch 84. The special game management status is internal information that is set on the control by the main control CPU 72 in accordance with the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol. The winning valid timer here is also set in consideration of the ball biting after the closing time of the variable winning device 30 has elapsed (for example, about 2 to 4 seconds).

  In the process of invalidating the winning detection signal, determination is made for each of the conditions (1) and (2) for each interrupt cycle, and the value of the invalid winning counter is incremented each time the winning detection signal is invalidated. When the value of the invalid prize counter reaches a specified value (for example, five) for each condition (1) and (2), the main control CPU 72 turns the illegal prize error flag ON (= 1) as internal information. As a result, an “illegal prize error” occurs in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S222: When the above winning validity determination process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then executes a magnetic detection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not there is an illegal act (so-called “magnet goto”) based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor (not shown). As a result, when a magnetic flux corresponding to an illegal act is detected, the main control CPU 72 sets the security error flag to ON (= 1). As a result, another “security error” occurs in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S224: The main control CPU 72 executes vibration detection processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not there is an illegal act (so-called “drilling”) based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor (not shown). As a result, when a vibration that is recognized as an illegal act is detected, the main control CPU 72 also turns on the security error flag.

  Step S226: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a winning excess detection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning occurrences per fixed time (for example, 1 minute), and determines whether or not an excessive winning amount equivalent to an illegal act has occurred. If it is determined that the winning is exceeded, the main control CPU 72 also turns on the security error flag.

  Step S228: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes a passage excess detection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of occurrences of passage of the start gate 20 per fixed time (for example, 1 minute), and determines whether or not an excess corresponding to an illegal act has occurred. If it is determined that it exceeds the limit, the main control CPU 72 also turns on the security error flag.

  Step S230: The main control CPU 72 checks the values of the “illegal prize error flag” and the “security error flag”. When any error flag is set to ON (= 1) (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S232. If none of the error flags is set to ON (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S232.

  Step S232: In this case, the main control CPU 72 executes error command processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates an error command (error state designation command) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126), and transfers the value to the command transmission buffer. The error command can set a different value for each error that has occurred. For example, when the “illegal prize error flag” is ON, a value that can be identified as “illegal prize error” is set in the error command, and when the “security error flag” is ON, a value that can be identified as “security error”. Set to error command. The error command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 11).

Step S234: Also, the main control CPU 72 executes an illegal winning mask process here. In this process, the main control CPU 72 rewrites all the winning detection signals determined to be invalid from ON to OFF, regardless of whether or not it is determined that the illegal winning error is determined in the previous winning validity determination process (step S220). As a result, the winning detection signal is treated as “OFF (no winning has been generated)” within the same interruption period, and the special symbol change, winning ball payout, etc. are not performed.
When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process.

[Switch input event processing]
Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S205 in FIG. 8). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S11 and executes a special symbol storing process. The specific contents of the special symbol storage process (step S11) will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S12.

  Step S12: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S13 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. Specific contents of the normal symbol memory update process (step S16) will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 8).

[Normal symbol memory update processing]
Next, the normal symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal symbol storage update process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the normal symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S20: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the normal symbol operating memory number counter to check whether or not the operating memory number is less than the maximum value of 4. The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of random numbers determined per ordinary symbol stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 1 byte each) for the normal symbols, and one random number determined per normal symbol can be stored in each section. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter reaches the upper limit value (maximum value) (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the upper limit value (maximum value) (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21.

  Step S21: The main control CPU 72 adds one normal symbol operation memory number. The normal symbol operation memory number counter is stored in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, for example, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is controlled by the display output management process (step S211 in FIG. 8).

  Step S22: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the determined random number per symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 has a data bus width of 8 bits, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the determined random number value per ordinary symbol from the designated address, it saves it as the determined random number per ordinary symbol in the address of the transfer destination (random number storage area). Note that the determined random number value per symbol may be acquired from the hit random number counter area of the RAM 76, for example. In this case, when the main control CPU 72 reads the determined random number value per ordinary symbol from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a per-decided random number corresponding to the ordinary symbol.

  Step S23: The main control CPU 72 transfers the determined random number per normal symbol to the random number storage area corresponding to the normal symbol, and stores it in an empty section in the area (lottery element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the determined random numbers are stored in order from the first section. . Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the determined random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read in the FIFO format.

  Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol effect command output setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs a setting for transmitting, for example, a normal design start sound control command to the effect control device 124. The main control CPU 72 may perform, for example, a prefetch determination process before this process. In this case, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the lottery is successful in the pre-reading determination process, and generates a normal destination determination effect command based on the result. And main control CPU72 can perform the setting for transmitting a universal destination determination production | presentation command with respect to the production | presentation control apparatus 124 by step S24.

  When the above procedure is completed or the normal symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (maximum value) (step S20: Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Normal design game processing]
Next, the details of the normal symbol game process (step S207 in FIG. 8) executed during the interrupt management process will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the normal symbol game process. Normal symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1001), normal symbol variation pre-processing (step S2001), normal symbol variation processing (step S3001), normal symbol stop display processing (step S4001), variable start winning device management. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5001). First, the basic flow of the normal game management process will be described along each process.

  Step S1001: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S2001 to S5001). For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the normal symbol game process in the “jump table” as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (the value of the normal game management status). For example, if the normal symbol has not yet started to be changed, the main control CPU 72 selects the normal symbol change pre-process (step S2001) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the normal symbol variation processing (step S3001) as the next jump destination, and if the normal symbol variation processing has been completed, For example, the normal symbol stop display process (step S4001) is selected as the jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

[Normal game management status]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the normal game management status (in the brackets) according to the game progress statuses (1) to (8) corresponding to the normal symbol as follows.
(1) Normal symbol variation waiting state: “00H”
(2) Normal symbol fluctuation display state: “01H”
(3) Normal symbol stop symbol display state: “02H”
(4) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) waiting to be opened: “03H”
(5) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) open state: “04H”
(6) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) closed state: “05H”
(7) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric equipment) after closing: “06H”
(8) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) during operation end time: “07H”

  Here, when the value of the normal game management status is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a normal game management status command reflecting the value. The normal game management status command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S2001: In the normal symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation for preparing conditions for starting the variation display of the regular symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3001: In the normal symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal symbol display device 33 while counting the change timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 33. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a normal symbol variation display is performed. In this embodiment, since the two symbols are alternately lit and extinguished to perform normal symbol variation display, the drive signal pattern can be configured simply (for example, in two patterns), and the main control accordingly. The load on the CPU 72 can be reduced.

  Step S4001: In the normal symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the driving of the normal symbol display device 33. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each of the two LEDs, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a normal symbol stop display is performed. In the present embodiment, among the two upper and lower LEDs, for example, a stop display at the time of winning is performed with the upper LED lit, and a stop display at the time of non-winning is performed with the lower LED lit. Yes (upper and lower logic may be reversed). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop time command corresponding to the normal symbol in the normal symbol stop displaying process. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S5001: The variable start winning device management process is selected when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner (for example, the upper LED is lit) in the previous normal symbol stop display process. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, in this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the variable start winning device 28 on the assumption that the operation condition is satisfied. The operating conditions for the variable start winning device 28 will be described later.

  While the variable start winning device 28 is in operation, the jump destination is set in the variable start winning device management process (step S5001) in the previous execution selection process (step S1001), and the normal symbol variation display is not performed. Further, in the variable start winning device management process, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is energized for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times (for example, once), so that the variable start winning device 28 operates in a set pattern, and the start winning winning is performed. It is possible to generate a prize for the mouth 28a (lottery opportunity generating operation means). In the present embodiment, the special symbol game process also proceeds with the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening 28a. However, for the sake of convenience, the normal symbol game process will be explained in advance below. To do.

[Normal pattern change pre-processing]
Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the normal symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the normal symbol operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demo setting process in step S6500.

  Step S6500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal symbol game process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol operation memory number counter is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6200.

  Step S6200: The main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol storage shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads a random number for lottery (normal random number determined per symbol) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 and stores it in, for example, another common storage area. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 sequentially reads the random numbers from the first section, and moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. Each random number stored in the common storage area is used for the operation lottery in the subsequent hit determination process.

  Step S6250: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol operating memory number subtraction process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the normal symbol operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76, and sets the value after subtraction to the “normal symbol fluctuation start operation memory number”. As a result, the display mode of the number stored by the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33 changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S213 in FIG. 8). When the procedure so far is completed, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6300.

  Step S6300: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit determination process (operation lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets a range of normal symbol value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (operation lottery execution means). The range of normal symbol values set at this time is different between the non-time shortened state (when the time shortening function is not activated) and the time shortened state (when the time shortening function is activated). In addition, since the range of the winning value is expanded, the winning probability of the operation lottery is set extremely high as compared with the non-time shortened state. If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the winning value, the main control CPU 72 sets the normal symbol winning flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S6400. In the present embodiment, the hit determination is performed by setting a range of the hit value on the program. However, the hit determination table is written in the ROM 74 in advance, and the hit determination is read and compared with the random number value. There are also programming examples. Further, the specific winning probability for each state will be further described later using another drawing.

  Step S6400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the hit flag in the previous hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6404.

  Step S6404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process upon disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the normal symbol display device 33. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol designation command and a lottery result command (at the time of failure) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  In addition, in this embodiment, since two LED is used for the normal symbol display device 33, as described above, for example, as described above, any one (lower side) LED lighting display is used as the stop symbol display mode. It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value. In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved. Such a way of thinking can be similarly applied to a case where a 7-segment LED is used for the normal symbol display device 33.

  Step S6406: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the normal symbol. The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the type of variation pattern or to define the variation time at that time, and is determined, for example, by random number lottery by the main control CPU 72. That is, in this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to, for example, a later-described variation pattern determination table and selects a variation pattern number corresponding to a random number per symbol (non-winning one) on this table. In the table, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern number (for example, 6.0 seconds to 180 seconds) is set in advance, and the main control CPU 72 acquires the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern number from the table. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, except for the case where the deviation reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time at the time of deviation is set based on, for example, “the number of operation memory at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S6250. The The variable time is set differently in the non-time shortened state and the time shortened state. In the non-time shortened state, the variable time is set based on the variation pattern number selected as described above. It is set to a fixed value (for example, 0.6 seconds). The setting of the variation time for each state will be further described later using another drawing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a control that causes a “reach effect” to be generated and a “reach effect” to occur without causing a “reach effect” is performed. To do. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of the deviation variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table to be used at the time of a loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means, varying time defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, for variation patterns 7 and 8 (variation pattern numbers “7” and “8”), a relatively long variation time (for example, 1 minute or more) is set, and is defined as “a specific type of variation pattern” For example, a super reach effect that is relatively longer than a normal reach effect is executed. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is not used at the time of this process, but also in a prior determination process for determining whether or not to hit in advance before the variation (for example, when a game ball passes through the start gate 20). Used (same for big hits).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 13: Normal symbol variation pre-processing]
The above steps S6404 and S6406 are control procedures when the hit determination result is out of order, but when the determination result is hit (step S6400: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure.

  Step S6410: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines a winning stop symbol number. However, in this embodiment, since a plurality of winning symbols are not provided for the normal symbols, the main control CPU 72 basically selects one type of stop symbol number.

  Step S6412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to a hit fluctuation pattern selection table to be described later. To determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol. In the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, basically, the hit reach variation pattern including the symbol effect is performed at the time of hitting the normal symbol, so the hit reach change pattern is finally selected here. In general, in the case of reach fluctuation at the time of hit, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of normal fluctuation is determined. In addition to the acquisition of the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in step S6412, for example, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number may be acquired in the normal symbol memory update process (FIG. 11). In this case, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired normal symbol variation random number as a set with the winning random number in step S23 of the normal symbol memory update process. In addition, if the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number are stored, it is possible to generate a notice effect based on the prefetching of the variation pattern before the variation using the stored contents. Is possible.

[Example of the variation pattern selection table for hits]
FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hit variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used when winning in a win. In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “13” to “20” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Here, the variation pattern numbers “13” to “19” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern number “20” corresponds to the fluctuation pattern that is a hit without performing the reach effect. For this reason, when the variation pattern numbers “13” to “19” are selected, the reach effect is executed, so that it is a hit with a relatively long variation time (for example, 30 seconds or more), but the variation pattern number “20”. When "" is selected, the reach effect is not performed, so that it is a hit with a relatively short variation time (about 10 to 20 seconds).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “14” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 13: Normal symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S6413: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (win symbol) by the normal symbol display device 33 based on the hit symbol number. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, there is one kind of stop symbol number, so the main control CPU 72 determines one display mode (the upper LED is lit). In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (winning time) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes normal symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit), and sets the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a normal symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal symbol game process.

[Figure 12: Normal symbol change processing, normal symbol stop display processing]
When returning to the normal symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 sets the normal symbol changing process (step S3001) as the next jump destination. In the normal symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and thereafter, according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter count number). Decrement the timer counter value. Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the timer counter and controls the normal symbol fluctuation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the normal symbol stop display process (step S4001) as the next jump destination.

  In the normal symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the normal symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the hit stop symbol determination process (steps S6404 and S6410 in FIG. 13). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. If the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the variable start winning device management process will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable start winning device management process. The variable start winning device management process includes a subroutine group of a game process selection process (step S5101), an opening pattern setting process (step S5201), an opening / closing operation process (step S5301), a closing process (step S5401), and an end process (step S5501). It is the structure containing.

  Step S5101: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S5201 to S5501). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable start winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation of the variable start winning device 28 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects an opening pattern setting process (step S5201) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the opening / closing operation process (step S5301) as the next jump destination, and if the opening / closing operation process has been completed, it closes as the next jump destination. A process (step S5401) is selected. When the opening / closing operation process and the closing process are executed, the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5501) as the next jump destination. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Open pattern setting process]
Step S5201: In the opening pattern setting process, the main control CPU 72 sets, for example, an operating time (opening time) and the number of operations (opening frequency) as the opening pattern of the variable start winning device 28. In the present embodiment, the operating time and the number of operations of the variable start winning device 28 are set in common in both the non-time shortening state and the time shortening state. The main control CPU 72 sets an opening / closing operation process (step S5301) as the next jump destination.

  Step S5301: In the next opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 drives the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 212 based on the operation time set in the previous step S5201. Thus, the variable start winning device 28 is actually actuated (opened). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets a closing process (step S5401) as the next jump destination.

  Step S5401: In the closing process, the main control CPU 72 counts the elapsed operating time based on the timer counter value. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 switches the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 212 to the non-operating state (OFF). Then, the main control CPU 72 sets an end process (step S5501) as the next jump destination.

  Step S5501: In the end process, the main control CPU 72 sets conditions for ending the operation of the variable start winning device 28. For example, the main control CPU 72 resets the value (01H) of the ordinary electric accessory operation flag. The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1001 in FIG. 12) in the normal symbol game process to the normal symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable start winning device management process.

[Normal symbol operating condition setting table]
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a normal symbol operating condition setting table. In this normal symbol operating condition setting table, the normal symbol hit probability and variation time are set differently in the non-time shortened state (during normal time) and the time shortened state (during time short), and the variable start winning device 28 for hitting is set. This is for setting an opening pattern (operation time and number of operations).

  As shown in the upper part excluding the heading line in FIG. 17, in this embodiment, in the operation lottery performed in the non-time shortening state (when the time shortening function is not operated), a normal hit probability (for example, 1 / 99) applies. In addition, for the normal symbol variation display performed in the non-time shortened state, the variation time set using the normal symbol variation random number as described above is applied.

  On the other hand, as shown in the lower part excluding the heading row in FIG. 17, in the operation lottery performed in the time shortening state (when the time shortening function is activated), a higher hit probability (for example, 98 / 99≈1 / 1.01) applies. Thereby, in the time shortening state, the operation lottery is won (the operation condition is satisfied) more frequently than in the non-time shortening state, so that the variable start winning device 28 is more likely to be won. Further, for the normal symbol variation display performed in the time shortening state, a fixed variation time (for example, 0.6 seconds) set in advance as described above is applied. However, in this embodiment, the operating time is set to be common (for example, 6.0 seconds) in both the non-time shortened state and the time shortened state, and the number of times of operation (one time) is also set in common. ing.

  The above is the outline of the control method for operating the operation lottery and variable start winning device 28 performed through the normal symbol game process (step S207 in FIG. 8). Next, a special symbol storing process (step S11 in FIG. 10) accompanying the winning to the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a) and a special symbol game process (in FIG. 8) that proceeds with the occurrence of the winning. The contents of step S206) will be described.

[Special symbol memory processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol storing process. Hereinafter, the special symbol storage process will be described along with a procedure example.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the special game management status is “00H”. The special game management status is separately set by the main control CPU 72 as follows according to the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol.

[Special Game Management Status]
That is, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the special game management status (in the brackets) according to the game progress statuses (1) to (8) corresponding to the special symbol as follows, for example.
(1) Special symbol change waiting state: “00H”
(2) Special symbol fluctuation display state: “01H”
(3) Special symbol stop symbol display state: “02H”
(4) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) waiting to be opened: “03H”
(5) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) open state: “04H”
(6) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) closed state: “05H”
(7) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) effective after closing: “06H”
(8) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) during operation end state: “07H”

  Here, when the value of the special game management status is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a special game management status command reflecting the value. The special game management status command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  When the value of the special game management status is other than “00H”, that is, when the current game progress status is other than the special symbol change waiting state (00H) (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 performs switch input event processing (FIG. Return to 10). On the other hand, if the value of the special game management status is “00H” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S32.

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 obtains the jackpot determined random number value from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 described above. The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 has a data bus width of 8 bits, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determined random number value from the designated address, it saves it as a jackpot determined random number at the address of the transfer destination (random number storage area).

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a big hit symbol random number value from the big hit symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves it as a jackpot symbol random number at the transfer destination address.

  Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 acquires, for example, a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the special symbol. Similarly, the acquisition of the random number value is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 acquires the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it in the transfer destination address.

  Step S36: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determined random number, jackpot symbol random number, and variation pattern determined random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the special symbol (at this time, the free state), and stores these random numbers as a set. .

  Step S38: The main control CPU 72 executes a production command output setting process for the special symbol. This process is for performing setting for transmitting a start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124, for example.

  When the above procedure is completed or the special symbol operation memory has already been stored (step S30: Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 8) will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management process. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of (Step S5000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change pre-processing has already been completed (special game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol changing process. Is completed (special game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol display device 34 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the special symbol display device 34. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the “limiter count” for the probability variation function or performs a subtraction process. The specific contents of the process and the significance of the “limiter count” will be further described later.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, an opportunity to shift to a big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, up to 6.0 seconds or until one winning is counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, twice). As a result, the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (variable winning means). During this period, the game ball is entered (winned) into the variable prize winning device 30, thereby giving the player an opportunity to win a prize ball (for example, 6 prize balls are paid out for one prize). (Winning privilege grant means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as “round”, and if the number of continuous operations is two, these may be collectively referred to as “2 rounds”. However, in this embodiment, since the opening time per time is relatively short (6.0 seconds) and the number of counts in one round is the minimum (for example, one), the general 15 rounds Compared with big hits (for example, 1 round 29 seconds open, number of counts 9), the number of prize balls that can be obtained with one big hit (2 rounds) is smaller.

  In any case, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the variable winning device 30 for one round Each time the release operation is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8). When the value of the round counter reaches the set number of continuous operations (in this example, 2 times), the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (main role) only for that round.

  When the big hit game (opening operation of the variable winning device 30) is finished, the main control CPU 72 determines the state (high probability state) after the big hit game based on the game state flag (probability changing function operating flag or time shortening function operating flag). , Change the time reduction state). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function operates, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes higher than usual (high probability state transition means). In the present embodiment, even if the probability variation function is in a “low probability state” in which the probability variation function is not activated, the winning probability in the internal lottery is set to a high value of about one half (for example, about 32768/65536). When shifting to the “high probability state” from here, the winning probability is set to a higher probability (for example, about 65535/65536).

  In the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability (for example, 1/99 → 98/99), and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened. (For example, fixed at about 0.6 seconds). In addition, the variation time of the special symbol is also set to be shorter than the non-time shortened state (for example, fixed at about 0.6 seconds). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them. Also, regarding the mechanism of internal state change such as “low probability state” or “high probability state”, “non-time shortening state” or “time shortening state”, the winning symbol (winning type) of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 1 This will be further described later together with the game system.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not there is a special symbol operation memory in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Alternatively, the main control CPU 72 may refer to the value of the working memory number counter to confirm whether the working memory number corresponding to the special symbol is other than 0 (= 1). Note that the operation memory of the special symbol is generated when a winning is made to the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a) in the switch input event process as described above. At this time, if it is confirmed that there is no working memory of the special symbol that should start changing (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process (FIG. 19). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is a special symbol working memory (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, first, the main control CPU 72 reads a lottery random number (a jackpot determined random number, a jackpot symbol random number) stored in a random number storage area of the RAM 76. The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area, and the working memory is erased (consumed) from the random number storage area. Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a range of the big hit value, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means, lottery execution means, second stage lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In any case, if the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the special symbol display device 34. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the special symbol display device 34, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is set to display only one segment (the bar “−” in the center). The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2406: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol. The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of deviation is basically set to a shortened time (for example, about 0.6 seconds). If it is not “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is determined based on, for example, a fluctuation pattern determination random number. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time (at the time of disconnection) in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  The above steps S2404 and S2406 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but when the determination result is big hit (step S2400: Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs the following procedure. Run. In this embodiment, even in the low probability state, the winning probability is a high value of 1/2, and even in the low probability state, the following processing is selected once every two times at the time of change.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the current winning symbol type (successful symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

  Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number read in the previous step S2300. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. The fluctuation time at the time of big hit also differs depending on whether or not the above-mentioned “time reduction state”. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and checks whether or not the current state is the “time reduction state”. In the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time is basically set to a shortened time (for example, about 0.6 seconds) even at the big hit time. If it is not “time shortening state”, a variation pattern corresponding to a certain long variation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 90 seconds) is set in order to secure a time for performing the effect during variation at the time of big hit. Further, in this embodiment, even when the “non-time shortened state” is off, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a certain long fluctuation time is set in order to execute “out of reach reach” during the fluctuation of the special symbol. The In any case, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of big hit) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of big hit in the stop symbol display timer.

  Step S2413: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the value of the probability variation function activation flag (for example, as a gaming state flag) when the type of winning symbol (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 corresponds to any probability variation symbol, for example. 01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76, and a count counter value (for example, 10,000 times) is set together. Further, when the time shortening function activation count corresponding to the winning symbol determined at that time is added, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function activation flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 as a gaming state flag. In addition, the count counter value (100 times or 10,000 times) is set. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a time reduction function operation number command (may be a count cut counter number command) based on the value of the time reduction function operation number added corresponding to the winning symbol. The time reduction function activation number command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. The addition of the type of winning symbol and the number of times the time shortening function is activated will be described later with a specific example.

  In the process of step S2413, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the special symbol display device 34 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit), and sets the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the stop symbol display time corresponding to the variation pattern in the display timer. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 19: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. The main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404 and S2410 in FIG. 20). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag. The special symbol stop display in-progress process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
Next, the types of winning symbols determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20) will be described. In this embodiment, the following three types are roughly prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The three types of breakdown are, for example, “2-round normal symbol 1”, “2-round probability variable symbol 1”, and “2-round probability variable symbol 2”. In the present embodiment, since winning symbols having different numbers of rounds are not provided, hereinafter, the number of rounds is not described, and “normal symbol 1”, “probability variation symbol 1”, “probability variation symbol 2”, and the like are appropriately omitted. . Moreover, these are only preferable examples, and the above three types of winning symbols are not exhaustive.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol with reference to the big hit stopping symbol selection table shown in FIG. 21 in the previous big hit stopping symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20) (winning type) Decision means). In addition, the main control CPU 72 can determine the number of times the time shortening function is activated according to the determined gaming state (non-time shortening state, time shortening state, low probability state, high probability state) for each determined winning symbol. .

  In the big hit stop symbol selection table shown in FIG. 21, the leftmost column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each of the distribution values “2”, “55”, and “43” indicates the denominator. This corresponds to a ratio (selection ratio) when 100 is set. In the second column from the left, “normal symbol 1”, “probability variation symbol 1” and “probability variation symbol 2” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big win in the internal lottery, the ratio that “normal symbol 1” is selected is 2/100 (= 2%), and the rate that “probable variation 1” is selected is 55/100 ( = 55%), and the rate at which “probability pattern 2” is selected is 43/100 (= 43%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Here, “normal symbol 1” is a winning symbol (non-probable variation symbol) that does not activate the probability variation function after the big hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol is 98% as a whole, and the “probability variation symbol” is selected at a very high ratio at the time of big hit.

[First-time limiter]
Next, in the table shown in FIG. 21, the third column from the left shows the number of times (upper limit number) of “first limiters” set for each winning symbol at the time of big hit. “Initial limiter” is set when it corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”. In this embodiment, for “probability variation symbol 1” and “probability variation symbol 2” Is also “17 times”. Of course, the “first limiter” is not set for “normal symbol 1” (indicated as “none” in the figure).

[Time reduction function operation count (time reduction count)]
Next, a description will be given of the difference in the number of times the time shortening function is activated, which is added for each winning symbol (winning type) and each winning state. In the present embodiment, the three types of winning symbols described above differ in the number of times the time shortening function is activated depending on the state at the time of winning. This will be specifically described below.

(1) Low probability non-short-time medium As shown in the third column from the left in FIG. 21, the special symbol (internal lottery) is “low probability state” and the normal symbol (operation lottery) is “non-probable”. It is assumed that the time is in a “time shortening state” (normal time that is neither probabilistic nor time-saving). In this case, when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1”, 100 times of the time shortening function activation number are added. In addition, when it corresponds to "normal symbol 1", the state after the big hit ends becomes a "low probability state".

  Further, when the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, 10,000 times of time reduction function activation times are added. It should be noted that the state after the jackpot is a “high probability state” regardless of whether the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when winning in the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol from the low probability non-short time (probability of 1/2), it becomes “time reduction state” after the end of the big hit game regardless of the winning symbol. . Therefore, the state does not shift to the “high probability non-short-to-medium” state, and is always in the “time reduction state” after the big hit. Further, the difference in the number of time reductions added in the “time reduction state (short time and medium)” is set as follows.

[Limiter count setting]
First, in the present embodiment, with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery), the internal state at the time of winning is “low probability state”, and from there, winning either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (first winning) Then, as described above, the “limiter count (initial limiter)” is set (continuous count setting means, limit count setting means). This “limiter count” is a limit (continuous count) that can be determined continuously when the main control CPU 72 corresponds to either “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2” when winning in the “high probability state”. Means.

[Selection of initial limiter count]
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, “17 times” is selected as described above when setting the “number of limiters (initial limiter)”. This selection can be determined depending on whether the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met when winning from the “low probability state”. That is, when winning (first winning) with either “probability changing symbol 1” or “probability changing symbol 2” from “low probability state”, in the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000 in FIG. 19), When the “limiter (limiter number)” is set, 17 times (including the first time) are selected (continuous number setting means, limit number setting means).

[Subtraction of limiter count]
In any case, the “limiter count (first limiter)” set at the first hit from the “low probability state” is the “probability pattern 1” or “probability pattern 2” following the winning in the “high probability state”. 1 (except for “normal symbol 1”), one is subtracted each time, and the remaining number of times (restricted number) decreases. However, while the “limiter count” does not reach the remaining zero (there is one or more remaining), the main control CPU 72 performs the “high probability state” in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20). It is possible to determine that it corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” continuously when winning. Therefore, first, a case where there is one or more remaining “limiter count” (before reaching the limiter) will be described.

(2) High probability before and after reaching the limiter For example, as shown in the third column from the right in FIG. 21, the special symbol (internal lottery) is “high probability state” and the normal symbol ( It is assumed that the “operating lottery” is in the “time reduction state”. That is, when the probability probability symbol 1 or the probability variation symbol 2 is met during the low probability non-time reduction in (1) above, the high probability time reduction state is reached after the big hit. Even in this case, the number of times the time shortening function is activated is added regardless of the winning symbol. Specifically, when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1”, 100 times of the time shortening function operation are added. In addition, when the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, in any case, the time reduction function operation count of 10,000 times is added. In this case, since either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is continuously won in the “high probability state”, “limiter count” is decremented by 1 as described above. In addition, regardless of whether it is “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2”, the state after the big hit is “high probability state”, and in addition, “time reduction state”. On the other hand, in the case of “normal symbol 1”, the state after the big hit ends returns to the “low probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery), but the “time reduction state” is maintained with respect to the normal symbol (operation lottery). The following is “(3) Low probability time short and medium”.

(3) Low probability during short time For example, as shown in the second column from the right in FIG. 21, the special symbol (internal lottery) is “low probability state” and the normal symbol (operation lottery) Assuming the case of “time reduction state”. If it falls under “Normal Symbol 1” during the low probability non-time reduction in (1) above, or if it falls under “Normal Symbol 1” during the high probability time short before reaching the limiter in (2) above, It becomes a state. In this case as well, the number of times the time reduction function is activated is always added to any of the three types of winning symbols (second stage lottery result limiting means). Specifically, when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1”, 100 times of the time shortening function operation are added. In addition, when the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, in any case, the time reduction function operation count of 10,000 times is added. In this case, since “low probability state” to “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is selected first, “limiter count” is reset. In this resetting, if the winning symbol is “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, 17 times is selected. And even if it corresponds to either "probability variation symbol 1" or "probability variation symbol 2", since the state after the big hit is a "high probability state" and a "time reduction state", as a result, the above (2) The high probability before and after reaching the limiter will be resumed. On the other hand, in the case of “normal symbol 1”, the state after the big hit ends returns to the “low probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery), but the “time reduction state” is maintained with respect to the normal symbol (operation lottery). The

[When reaching the limiter]
In the “high probability state”, either “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2” is won (selection ratio 98%), and “limiter count” is subtracted each time. Assume that the “limiter count” reaches the remaining zero.

  When the “limiter count” reaches the remaining 0, the main control CPU 72 cannot determine that either of the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met when winning in the “high probability state”. . Specifically, even if the jackpot symbol random number corresponds to either “probable symbol 1” or “probable symbol 2”, the final winning symbol is “normal symbol 1” or “normal symbol 2”. (For example, winning type restricting means, second stage lottery result restriction releasing means).

(4) High probability at the time of reaching the limiter Short and medium The forced change of the winning symbol is shown in the rightmost column in FIG. That is, when the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0 in the “high probability state” and the “time shortening state”, even if it corresponds to “probability variation 1” (selection ratio 55%) on the table, The final winning symbol is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 1” (composite selection ratio is 57%). Or even if it is a case corresponding to “probability variation 2” (selection ratio 43%) on the table, the final winning symbol is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 2”. As a result of such a forced change (regulation) of the winning symbol, the “high probability state” after the remaining “limiter count” reaches zero is not continued, and once the big hit ends, the “low probability” It will be forcibly returned to "state". In addition, when “normal symbol 1” is normally selected as the winning symbol and when “normal symbol 1” is forcibly selected (composite selection ratio 57%), the time reduction function is 100 times. The number of times of operation is added, but when “normal symbol 2” is forcibly selected (selection ratio 43%), the number of times of time shortening function operation is not added (0 time = no time reduction). This means that when the “limiter count” reaches zero, it always returns to the “low probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery). This means that the rate of return is 43% of the total, and the remaining 57% is maintained in the “time reduction state” (second stage lottery result restriction canceling means).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be seen that the number of times the time shortening function is added is different depending on the state at the time of winning and the number of remaining limiters (before arrival / when reaching). In particular, in the present embodiment, “(4) High probability time when reaching the limiter” becomes “non-time shortened state” only when “normal symbol 2” is forcibly selected, otherwise “time” It turns out that it becomes a shortened state. In the present embodiment, the case where the number of times the time reduction function is activated is added as “normal symbol of the first category (normal winning type)”, and the case where the number of times of time reduction function activation is not added is designated as the “normal symbol of the second category”. (Normal winning type) ". In the present embodiment, the lottery result indicating that a specific condition is applied when the state is shifted to the “time reduction state” regardless of the state at the time of winning or the remaining number of limiters (before arrival or at the time of arrival). Is obtained, and the case where the process is not shifted to the “time reduction state” is obtained when a lottery result indicating that the specific condition is not applied is obtained.

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process (step S3000 in FIG. 19). A method for setting the above “limiter count” (selecting the first limiter 17 times) and performing a subtraction process will be described below along with a specific procedure for the special symbol stop display process.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (for example, decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 19), and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here.

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4310.

  Step S4310: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol is a probability variation symbol. This confirmation can be made based on the big hit stop symbol number. That is, if the current big hit stop symbol number corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S4320.

[When probability variation is selected]
Step S4320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning time is the “high probability state”. When the current winning time is the “low probability state” (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4332.

  Step S4332: When the winning symbol is either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, the main control CPU 72 sets 17 as the “limiter count (first limiter)” (continuous count setting means and continuous count) Processing as setting means, limit number setting means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 saves 17 times (remaining limiter number = 17) as the value of the “limiter count”, for example, in the remaining number counter area of the RAM 76.

  Step S4340: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the first “limiter count” set in the previous step S4332. This is because the “limiter count” includes the time of the first chance variation winning from the “low probability state”. In this embodiment, the “limiter count” including the first chance variation winning (first time) is set. However, when the “limiter count” is set not to include the first limit (for example, 16 times), step S4340 is performed. You may adopt the logic which skips.

  The above is an example of the procedure when the current winning time is the “low probability state”, but when the current winning time is the “high probability state” (step S4320: Yes), the main control CPU 72 Perform the procedure.

[Subtraction of 17 initial limiters]
Step S4340: When the initial limiter is 17 times, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the "limiter count" and saves (updates) the value after the subtraction in the remaining number counter area. That is, when the “high probability state” after the “limiter count” is set to 17 times for the first time, and the current winning is the second consecutive of “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, Since the “limiter count” has already been subtracted to 16 at the time of the first winning, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one more “limiter count” at the second time and updates the “limiter count” to the remaining 15 times. To do. Or, if this time's winning is “Continuous Variation 1” or “Continuous Variation 2”, the “Limiter Count” subtracted 15 times in the 2nd time is subtracted by 1 in the 3rd time. The “limiter count” is updated with the remaining 14 times. As a result, when the first “limiter count” is set to 17 and the “high probability state” is a big hit, if either of the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is consecutively met, Each time the “limiter count” is decreased, the continuous count subtraction means.

  After this, if it falls under either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” up to the 17th time every winning, the “limiter count” subtracted to the remaining one time in the 16th time is further increased to 17 If one is subtracted at the second time, the rest reaches zero. In this case, when the main control CPU 72 executes the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20) at the next winning, the “limiter count” remains 0 when determining the winning symbol using the table of FIG. Since the number of times has been reached, as described above, “probability symbol 1” is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 1”, and “probability symbol 2” is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 2”. .

[Normal design selected]
On the other hand, in the previous step S4310, the current big hit stop symbol number corresponds to the above-mentioned “normal symbol 1”, or “normal symbol 1” or “normal symbol 2” forcibly determined. If this is the case (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4345.

  Step S4345: In this case, the main control CPU 72 clears the value of “the number of limiters” to 0 (remaining number of limiters = 0). Note that the main control CPU 72 selects “normal symbol 1” or “normal symbol 2” as the current winning symbol in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20) (including forcing). Therefore, the value of “number of limiters” may be cleared.

  Step S4346: In any case, when the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 next generates a limiter remaining number command based on the current “number of limiters”. The limiter remaining number command generated here is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S4350: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management processing”.

  Step S4355: Also, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag at the time of turning off the function. Thereby, when at least one of the time reduction function or the probability variation function is activated before the big hit game is started, the function is deactivated.

Step S4400: The main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 also generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is being hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.
When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter value is set in the probability variation count area or the time-short count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. Here, although “number of times cut” is used, the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” is set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). Also, in the case of the “time shortening state”, the number of operation times of 10,000 may be added depending on the winning symbol as described above. By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In addition, when 100 times is added as the number of times of operation in the “time reduction state”, the value of the count cut counter is set to 100 times, but in this embodiment, the normal symbol in the “time reduction state” (operation lottery) Since the winning probability is approximately one-tenth (98/99), it is probabilistically guaranteed that the “time reduction state” will continue until the next time even 100 times.

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count-down counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 erases the flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variation function activation flag or the time shortening function activation flag is erased, but the value of the count-down counter is not substantially zero in the “high probability state” as described above, and similarly In the “time shortening state”, the value of the count-down counter is substantially zero. However, since it may occur theoretically, if the value of the count-down counter actually becomes 0, the corresponding probability variation function activation flag or time reduction function activation flag is deleted. As a result, the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state” ends after the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[Prize ball payout processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a prize ball payout process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S1300: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the variable starting winning device 28. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1310 and Step S1320. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S1310 and S1320, but then executes step S1330.

  Step S1310: The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball instruction command corresponding to the first profit. Here, the 1st profit has shown the number of prize balls with respect to generation | occurrence | production of one prize in the variable start prize-winning apparatus 28, for example, can be made into the profit by payout of nine game balls. The prize ball instruction command generated here is output to the payout control device 92.

  Step S1320: The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball content command corresponding to the first profit. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S1330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1340 and step S1350. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute Steps S1340 and S1350, but then executes Step S1360.

  Step S1340: The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball instruction command corresponding to the second profit. Here, the 2nd profit has shown the number of prize balls with respect to generation | occurrence | production of one prize in the variable prize-winning apparatus 30, For example, it can be made into the profit by paying out six game balls. The prize ball instruction command generated here is output to the payout control device 92.

  Step S1350: The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S1360: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the winning port switch 86 corresponding to the normal winning ports 22, 24, 25. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1370 and Step S1380. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 8) without executing steps S1370 and S1380.

  Step S1370: The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball instruction command corresponding to the third profit. Here, the 3rd profit has shown the number of prize balls with respect to generation | occurrence | production of 1 time of winning in the normal winning opening 22,24,25, For example, it can be made into the profit by paying out 10 game balls. The prize ball instruction command generated here is output to the payout control device 92.

Step S1380: The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball content command corresponding to the third profit. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 8).

FIG. 24 is a table showing a list of right-handed conditions used in the launch position designation flag management process.
In the left column in the figure, conditions for determining that the main control CPU 72 is right-handed are shown. Specifically, four conditions from the first condition to the fourth condition are shown.
The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not these four conditions are satisfied while referring to a right-handed condition table (launching position specifying condition defining means) in which these four conditions are defined. The main control CPU 72 determines that it is right-handed when there is a condition that satisfies any one of the four conditions from the first condition to the fourth condition. The main control CPU 72 naturally determines that it is right-handed when all the conditions are satisfied.
On the other hand, details of each condition are shown in the right column in the figure. Hereinafter, details of each condition will be described in order.

[First condition]
The first condition is “the variable winning device (special electric accessory) is in operation”. Whether or not the first condition is satisfied can be determined from the value of the special game management status. Specifically, when the value of the special game management status is “03H” to “07H”, the main control CPU 72 can determine that the first condition is satisfied.

[Second condition]
The second condition is “the variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) is in operation (except during the end time) during non-temporary times”. Whether or not the second condition is satisfied can be determined from the value of the normal game management status in the non-time shortened state. Specifically, when the value of the normal game management status is “03H” to “06H” in the non-time shortened state, the main control CPU 72 can determine that the second condition is satisfied.

[Third condition]
The third condition is that “the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner during the time reduction”, “the normal symbol is in the stop display during the time reduction”, and “the variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) during the time reduction. It is in operation (except during the end time). Note that if any one of these conditions is satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the third condition is satisfied. Further, in the present embodiment, the condition that “the normal symbol is being variably displayed during the time reduction” includes both the variation of the normal symbol at the time of winning and the variation of the normal symbol at the time of non-winning.

  Whether or not the third condition is satisfied can be determined based on the value of the normal game management status in the time saving state. Specifically, in the time reduction state, when the value of the normal game management status is “01H” to “06H”, the main control CPU 72 can determine that the third condition is satisfied.

[Fourth condition]
The fourth condition is that “a working memory of a normal symbol exists in a short time”. Whether or not the fourth condition is satisfied can be determined by confirming the number of working memories of the normal symbol in the time shortening state. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 can determine that the fourth condition is satisfied if the number of working memories of the normal symbol is “1 or more” in the time reduction state.

  The main control CPU 72 determines left-handed or right-handed in the following launch position designation flag management process while referring to these four conditions.

[Launch position designation flag management processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the launch position designation flag management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S1100: The main control CPU 72 stores the previous state of the launch position designation flag. Here, the firing position designation flag is a variable that stores the determination content of the firing position by the main control CPU 72 (holds the state relating to the launch position of the game ball) and is stored in the RAM 76 (determination content storage means). The value set in the launch position designation flag is “00H”, “01H”, or “03H”. In this process, the main control CPU 72 copies the value of the firing position designation flag to a flag (for example, the previous state storage flag) different from the firing position designation flag. Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can save the previous state of the launch position designation flag. The reason for saving the previous state is to avoid the unknown state of the previous state because the process of overwriting the launch position designation flag occurs in the following control process. .

  Step S1102: The main control CPU 72 sets “00H” in the launch position designation flag. Here, setting “00H” in the launch position designation flag means that it is left-handed. Therefore, setting “00H” in the launch position designation flag means that it is left-handed. Information is stored in the launch position designation flag.

Step S1104: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a time shortening state. Whether or not it is a time shortening state can be confirmed by a time shortening function operation flag.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1106. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the time reduction state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1114.

Step S1104: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the fourth condition is satisfied. The details of the fourth condition are as described above.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the fourth condition is satisfied (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1108. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the fourth condition is satisfied (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S1108.

  Step S1108: The main control CPU 72 sets “03H” in the launch position designation flag. Here, setting “03H” in the launch position designation flag means that it is right-handed except under a special situation. Therefore, by setting “03H” in the launch position designation flag, The information that it is normal right-handed is stored in the launch position designation flag.

Step S1110: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the third condition is satisfied. The details of the third condition are as described above.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the third condition is satisfied (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1112. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the third condition is satisfied (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1118 without executing step S1112.

  Step S1112: The main control CPU 72 sets “03H” in the launch position designation flag. Here, setting “03H” in the launch position designation flag means that it is right-handed except under a special situation. Therefore, by setting “03H” in the launch position designation flag, The information that it is normal right-handed is stored in the launch position designation flag.

Step S1114: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the second condition is satisfied. Details of the second condition are as described above.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the second condition is satisfied (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1116. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the second condition is satisfied (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1118 without executing step S1116.

  Step S1116: The main control CPU 72 sets “03H” in the launch position designation flag. Here, setting “03H” in the launch position designation flag means that it is right-handed except under a special situation. Therefore, by setting “03H” in the launch position designation flag, The information that it is normal right-handed is stored in the launch position designation flag.

Step S1118: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not it is in a special situation (special launch position determining means).
Here, the “special situation” is a case where the remaining number of limiters (restricted number) reaches the value (“1”) before the specified value (“0”), and the winning symbol is won. Therefore, if the remaining number of limiters is not reset, the remaining number of limiters reaches the specified value after the operation of the variable winning device 30 when the remaining number of limiters reaches the previous value of the specified value. This is until the start of operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time.

  Specifically, a special situation is a so-called limiter machine that has a high probability of operation, and the continuous action device operation continues until the limiter function is activated. When the number of times is x, the high probability state continues (x-2) times, and at the (x-2) th high probability, the object is continuously activated by the operation of the (x-1) th condition device with a specific symbol. This is a period from the end of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device when the operation device is operated to the operation of the x-th condition device (so-called “limiter operation time”).

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the situation is a special situation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1120. On the other hand, if the special situation cannot be confirmed (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S1120.

  Step S1120: The main control CPU 72 sets “01H” in the launch position designation flag. Here, setting “01H” in the launch position designation flag means right-handed under a special situation. Therefore, by setting “01H” in the launch position designation flag, Information that it is right-handed in a situation different from normal is stored in the launch position designation flag.

Step S1122: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first condition is satisfied. The details of the first condition are as described above.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the first condition is satisfied (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1124. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the first condition is satisfied (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S1124.

  Step S1124: The main control CPU 72 sets “03H” in the launch position designation flag. Here, setting “03H” in the launch position designation flag means that it is right-handed except under a special situation. Therefore, by setting “03H” in the launch position designation flag, The information that it is normal right-handed is stored in the launch position designation flag.

  Step S1126: The main control CPU 72 compares the previous state of the launch position designation flag with the current launch position designation flag. The previous state of the launch position designation flag is stored in the previous state storage flag in the previous step S1100.

  Step S1128: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether BIT0 (least significant bit) has changed. Specifically, when the least significant bit of the previous state storage flag is “0” and the least significant bit of the current launch position designation flag is “1”, or the least significant bit of the previous state storage flag is “ If it is “1” and the least significant bit of the current launch position designation flag is “0”, it is determined that BIT0 has changed.

  Step S1130: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of extracting the least significant bit (BIT0) of the current launch position designation flag. For example, when the launch position designation flag is “00H”, “0” is extracted as BIT0, and when the launch position designation flag is “01H” or “03H”, “1” is extracted as BIT0. The

  Step S1132: The main control CPU 72 executes a command subsequent value determination process. Specifically, a process of determining a command subsequent value based on the value of BIT0 extracted in the previous step S1130 is executed. Here, when the extracted BIT0 value is “0”, “00H” is selected as the left-handed subsequent value, and when the extracted BIT0 value is “1”, the right-handed subsequent value is selected. “01H” is selected.

  Step S1134: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for generating a firing position designation command. Specifically, an identifier (for example, “E0H”) indicating that it is a launch position designation command is set as the preceding value of the command, the subsequent value selected in the previous step S1132 is set as the subsequent value of the command, and the launch position is set. Generate a specified command. The firing position designation command generated here is stored in the transmission buffer and output to the production control device 124 in the production control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8) (launch position designation information notification means).

Thus, in this embodiment, in order to notify the launch position designation command only when the launch position designation direction changes, the main controller 70 on the side that transmits the launch position designation command, or the launch position designation command Can be synergistically reduced in the communication burdens of both the production control devices 124 on the receiving side.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 8).

FIG. 26 is a conceptual diagram showing details of the launch position designation flag.
As shown in the left column in the figure, the value set in the launch position designation flag is one of “00H”, “01H”, and “03” H.

When “00H” is set in the launch position designation flag, this means “left-handed” as shown in the middle column in the figure.
Further, when “01H” is set in the launch position designation flag, it means “right-handed under special circumstances” as shown in the middle column in the figure.
Further, when “03H” is set in the launch position designation flag, it means “normal (except under special circumstances) right-handed” as shown in the middle column in the figure.

  On the other hand, the right column in the figure shows a value indicating the firing position designation flag in binary. The launch position designation flag consists of 1 byte (8 bits) of information, and is composed of the most significant bit BIT7 to the least significant bit BIT0.

When “00H” is set in the launch position designation flag, “00000000” is stored as binary information from the most significant bit BIT7 to the least significant bit BIT0.
When “01H” is set in the launch position designation flag, “00000001” is stored as binary information from the most significant bit BIT7 to the least significant bit BIT0.
Further, when “03H” is set in the launch position designation flag, “00000011” is stored as binary information from the most significant bit BIT7 to the least significant bit BIT0.

The information of BIT0 of the least significant bit in the firing position designation flag is used for control of “launching position designation signal 1”, “launching position designation command”, and “launching position designation display lamp”.
On the other hand, the information of the second BIT1 from the bottom in the launch position designation flag is used for control of the “launch position designation signal 2”.

[Test signal processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of test signal processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S1150: The main control CPU 72 executes normal test signal generation processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer.

  Step S1152: The main control CPU 72 executes a firing position designation flag confirmation process. Specifically, a process for loading a launch position designation flag stored in the RAM 76 is executed.

  Step S1154: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a firing position designation signal 1 (first external signal) based on the firing position designation flag BIT0. Specifically, when BIT0 of the launch position designation flag indicates a value “1”, the main control CPU 72 sets the launch position designation signal 1 to ON. On the other hand, when BIT0 of the launch position designation flag indicates “0”, the main control CPU 72 sets the launch position designation signal 1 to OFF.

Step S1156: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a launch position designation signal 2 (second external signal) based on the launch position designation flag BIT1. Specifically, when BIT1 of the launch position designation flag indicates a value “1”, the main control CPU 72 sets the launch position designation signal 2 to ON. On the other hand, when BIT1 of the launch position designation flag indicates a value of “0”, the main control CPU 72 sets the launch position designation signal 2 to OFF.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 8).

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S213 in FIG. 8) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a subroutine group of a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), and an operation memory display setting process (step S1230). It is.

  Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are, as already described, the special symbol display device 34, the normal symbol display device. 33 and a process of generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) is a process for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. Details of the state display setting process will be described later using another flowchart.

[Status display setting processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the state display setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S1221: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability variation function operation flag is ON when the power is turned on.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation function operation flag is ON when the power is turned on (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1222. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the probability variation function operation flag is ON when the power is turned on (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1223.

  Step S1222: The main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38c. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38c continues to be lit until the big hit game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off (inactivated) after the special symbol variation display is performed a specified number of times. Then, it is switched to non-display (lights off).

  Step S1223: The main control CPU 72 outputs a turn-off signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38c.

  Step S1224: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the time reduction function operation flag is ON.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction function operation flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1225. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the time shortening function operation flag is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1226.

  Step S1225: The main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38d. The time-short state display lamp 38d is lit regardless of whether or not the power is turned on.

  Step S1226: The main control CPU 72 outputs a turn-off signal to the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38d.

Step S1227: The main control CPU 72 executes a launch position designation display lamp management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of controlling the LED corresponding to the launch position designation display lamp 38e. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the display output management process (FIG. 28).

[Launch position designation display lamp management process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the launch position designation display lamp management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S1160: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of extracting the least significant bit (BIT0) of the firing position designation flag. For example, when the launch position designation flag is “00H”, “0” is extracted as BIT0, and when the launch position designation flag is “01H” or “03H”, “1” is extracted as BIT0. The

  Step S1162: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the extracted value extracted in step S1160 is “1”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the extracted value is “1” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1164. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the extracted value is “1” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1166.

  Step S1164: The main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38e. The launch position designation display lamp 38e is turned on regardless of whether or not the power is turned on.

Step S1164: The main control CPU 72 outputs a turn-off signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38e.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the state display setting process (FIG. 29).

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not yet been started, the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .

  Step S5200: In the special winning opening opening pattern setting process, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern for each opening time, closing time, interval and number of rounds in one round. In the present embodiment, the maximum open time of one round is, for example, “6.0 seconds”, the closing time is, for example, “about 0.5 seconds”, and the number of rounds is fixed to “2 rounds”. As a result, values are set in the open timer, the close timer, the interval timer, and the round number counter, respectively. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big winning opening / closing operation process. However, the above opening pattern is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Step S5300: Next, in the big winning opening / closing operation processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the opening / closing operation (opening operation) of the variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90. As a result, the opening / closing member 30a of the variable winning device 30 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and it becomes possible to generate a winning (winning) at the big winning opening 30b. Further, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the release timer, and if the value of the release timer is not less than or equal to 0, the main control CPU 72 next executes the counting of the number of winning balls. When it is confirmed that the opening time has ended or the count number has reached a predetermined number (for example, one), the main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the closing timer. When the value of the closing timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 subsequently executes the count-down of the interval timer (only the first round). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the next jump destination is set to the big prize closing process. In the second round, when the value of the closing timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big prize closing process.

  Step S5400: In the special winning opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 continues the operation of the variable winning device 30 or ends the operation. That is, if the current gaming state is a big hit (a big game), the main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the first round ends, and the value of the round number counter increases at the stage toward the second round. The main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter when the next jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation processing.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening / closing operation process as the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100). Then, the variable winning device until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (2 times) by the main control CPU 72 executing the special prize opening closing process again after the special prize opening opening / closing operation process is executed. 30 opening and closing operations are executed continuously. When the actual round number reaches the set execution round number, the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), and sets the next jump destination to the end process. Further, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the end process. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72.
Step S5504: Also, the main control CPU 72 ends the state of being a big player internally here.

  Step S5505: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the flag area of the RAM 76 and checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2413 in FIG. 20) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5506: When the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5505: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number-of-times cut function activation flag corresponding to the probability variation function. Thereby, the internal state after the end of the big hit game is set to the “high probability state”.

  Step S5507: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, about 10,000). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, with a high probability (about 65,535,65536), the non-winning will hardly continue 10,000 times, so the high probability state will continue substantially until the next winning. If the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set (step S5505: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5506 and S5507.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the flag area of the RAM 76 and checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This time reduction function operation flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2413 in FIG. 20) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing. If the time reduction function operation flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5511.

  Step S5511: When the value of the time shortening function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the time cut function operating flag corresponding to the time shortening function. Thereby, the internal state after the end of the big hit game is set to “time reduction state” (processing as time reduction state transition means or time reduction state continuation means).

  Step S5512: Also, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the count-down counter corresponding to the time shortening function based on the number of times the time shortening function is activated (100 times or 10,000 times) corresponding to the current winning symbol. The set number-of-times counter value is stored in the above-mentioned time count area of the RAM 76. If the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5511, S5514. In this case, it does not shift to the “time reduction state” after the big hit ends (processing as a non-time reduction state return means).

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command here. Specifically, with the reset of the big hit flag, a state designation command that represents “normally” as the gaming state is generated. In addition, when the value of the count-off counter is set based on the number of times the probability variation function is activated, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, When “” is set, a state designation command indicating “time reduction state” is generated as an internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S5516: After the above procedure at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 19) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

  The above is the contents of various control processes performed by the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). When the main control CPU 72 executes these processes, the game by the pachinko machine 1 is specifically progressed.

[Game Flow]
Next, FIG. 33 is a game flow diagram illustrating an example of a game flow by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. A game by the pachinko machine 1 proceeds by driving (launching) a game ball into the game area 8a in accordance with the player's operation. Hereinafter, the flow of the game on the premise that the game ball is launched will be described. In the following description, reference numerals F1 to F47 and the like in the drawings are indicated with parentheses as appropriate. Further, “winning” used in the following description means that “the detected ball is treated as valid”.

[F1] During normal game For example, when a player starts a game with the pachinko machine 1, it is assumed that the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 is in a "normal game" state. In the present embodiment, the state of “normally playing” is “non-time shortened state (ordinary drawing low probability)” with respect to the normal symbol (operating lottery), and “low probability state (special feature) with respect to the special symbol (internal drawing). Means low probability).

[F2] Normal symbol non-winning [F1] During normal game, when the game passes through the middle start gate 20 (or the right start gate 21), the above-described operation lottery is executed. When the result of the operation lottery is non-winning, no internal state change occurs, and [F1] normal game is continued as it is.

[F3] Per normal symbol in normal game On the other hand, [F1] If the game lottery is won during normal game, the game flow proceeds to the next stage.

[F4] Variable Start Winning Device Operation In this case, the variable start winning device 28 is operated, and it becomes possible to generate a winning at the start winning port 28a as described above. In addition, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), it is necessary to drive a game ball toward the right side in the game area 8a after winning the normal symbol (action lottery).

[F5] No winning When the variable starting winning device 28 is in operation (operating time 6.0 seconds) and no winning is made to the starting winning port 28a, the game flow returns to [F1] normal game. In this case, the game flow is resumed from the operation lottery.

[F6] Starting Port Winning In contrast, when a winning to the starting winning port 28a occurs while the variable start winning device 28 is operating (operating time 6.0 seconds), the game flow further proceeds to the next stage. In addition, although the winning that triggers the internal lottery is valid only once, each time a plurality of winnings (on average, 7 to 8 winnings) occur during operation of the variable start winning device 28, A prize bonus (for example, 12 prize ball payouts per prize ball) is given to the player.

[F7] Special symbol variation A special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning port 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F8] Non-winning When the internal lottery is not won, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. In this case, the game flow returns to [F1] normal game and is resumed from the operation lottery.

[F11] Normal symbol 1 winning When the winning symbol is an internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to the above-mentioned “normal symbol 1”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing “normal symbol 1”. In this case, the game flow further proceeds to the next stage.

[F12] Variable winning device operation
The variable winning device 30 is opened by winning in the special symbol (internal lottery), and the number of times of opening is 2 (2 rounds). In the case of “normal symbol 1”, the probability variation function operation flag is not set, but the time reduction function operation count is set to 100 times. For this reason, the game flow after the opening operation of the variable winning device 30 is not [F1] during normal game, but proceeds to the stage of [F31] time reduction. In addition, the game flow from [F31] time is described later.

[F16] Probability Variation 1, 2 Winning On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the above-mentioned “probability variation 1”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing “probability variation 1”. Alternatively, when the winning symbol corresponds to the “probability variation 2”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the “probability variation 2”. In either case, the game flow proceeds to the following stage.

[F14] Limiter remaining number set [F1a] In the case of normal winning, the “limiter count” is internally set to the remaining 16 times (the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the initial limiter 17 times) (limiter remaining) Number = 16).

[F18] Variable prize-winning device operation (during big role)
By winning the special symbol (internal lottery), the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation. In addition, in the case of either “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2”, the probability variation function activation flag is set and the time reduction function activation count is set to 10000 times. The game flow after the opening operation of the device 30 proceeds to the probability change (high probability, short time: F19).

[F19] Probability change (high probability, short time)
In the present embodiment, once the game flow enters [F19] probability change, it is easy to continue [F19] probability change in terms of probability. Hereinafter, this point will be specifically described.

[F20] Normal symbol non-winning [F19] During probability change, the winning probability of the normal symbol (working lottery) is set to approximately one-tenth (98/99), so it is probable that it will not win rare. However, in theory, there is a possibility of non-winning, and if it is not won, the game in [F19] probability change will be continued.

[F21] Per normal symbol during probability change In the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), [F19] During the probability change, a game ball is shot into the right side portion in the game area 8a (so-called "right hit"). Is assumed. As a result, when the game ball passes through the right start gate 21, it is won with almost one change of the normal symbol. Further, since the variation time is shortened (0.6 seconds) as described above, the game flow proceeds to the next stage in a very short time.

[F22] Variable start winning device operation The variable start winning device 28 is activated by winning the normal symbol (actuation lottery), and the start winning port 28a is ready for winning. In the present embodiment, the operating time of the variable start winning device 28 is constant (6.0 seconds) even in the “time reduction state”. However, if a game ball is driven into the right side portion in the game area 8a, the game ball flows down toward the variable start winning device 28 that is operating as it is.

[F23] No winning Even if no winning is made to the starting winning opening 28a during operation of the variable starting winning device 28 for some reason (out of ball, clogged ball, defective firing operation, etc.), the game flow is [F19] Since the probability change is continued, there is no extreme disadvantage for the player.

[F24] Start opening prize [F19] If a winning to the start winning opening 28a occurs during the operation of the variable start winning apparatus 28 due to the "right-handed" flow during the probability change, the game flow proceeds to the next stage.

[F25] Special Symbol Variation Similarly, a special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning port 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F26] Non-winning With regard to the special symbol (internal lottery), the winning probability in the “high probability state” is approximately one-tenth (65535/65536), and therefore, almost no non-winning occurs probabilistically. However, in the rare event that the internal lottery is not won, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. In this case, since the game flow continues during [F19] probability change, there is no extreme disadvantage for the player. Moreover, since the maximum number of times the time shortening function is activated is set to 10,000 times, even if one non-winning event occurs, the number of time reductions still remains.

[F27] Probability Variation 1, 2 Winning In this embodiment, since the probability variation ratio is 98% of the total as described above, the probability variation symbol is selected at a high frequency when winning. [F19] When the winning symbol falls under either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” during probability variation, 10,000 times are added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated as described above. In [F19], the continuation during the probability change is confirmed internally.

[F28] Limiter remaining number -1
In this case, since the positive variation is continuously selected in the “high probability state”, the “limiter count” is subtracted internally (limiter remaining number−1).

[F18] Variable prize-winning device operation (during big role)
Similarly, the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). The probability variation function activation flag is set and the time shortening function activation count is set to 10000 times for both cases of “probability variation symbol 1” and “probability variation symbol 2”. In addition, the game flow after the opening operation of the variable winning device 30 continues to be in the process of being probabilistic (high probability, short time: F19).

[Chance zone due to certain change]
As described above, once the game flow shifts to [F19] during certain change, [F21] from the normal symbol [F22] variable start winning device operation, [F24] start opening winning, [F25] special symbol fluctuation, [F27 ) Probability symbol 1, 2, winning, [F28] Limiter remaining -1, and [F18] Variable winning device activated, [F19] Looping during probability change is most frequent (or probability, rate, ratio) It becomes easy to occur. In this case, since the variable start winning device 28 is operated once in one loop and the variable winning device 30 performs the two round opening operation, the game ball is basically driven into the right portion in the game area 8a. If it is, the winning ball is paid out in response to the occurrence of the winning at the start winning opening 28a and the occurrence of the winning at the large winning opening 28b.

  Each time the above loop is performed once, [F28] Limiter remaining number -1 decreases the remaining "limiter count", but the same frequency remains high until the remaining zero is reached. The loop will be repeated.

[F29] Normal Symbol 1 Winning during Probability On the other hand, if [F19] Winning Symbol corresponds to “Normal Symbol 1” during Probability Change, the game flow is as follows. In this case, since it is not a probabilistic symbol, the “high probability state” is not maintained, but since 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, the continuation of the “time shortening state” is promised internally at this point. .

[F30] Variable winning device activated
Similarly, the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). Although not shown, the remaining limiter count is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the control process of the main control CPU 72 as described above (limiter reset).

[F31] Shorter time [F19] If “normal symbol 1” is met from the probability change, the probability variation function activation flag is cleared, but the time reduction function activation count is set to 100 times. The game flow after the release operation shifts to a short time (low probability short time) (continuous number resetting opportunity generating means).

[F20] Normal symbol non-winning [F31] During the short time, the winning probability of the normal symbol (working lottery) is set to about 1 (98/99), so it is almost impossible to win Absent. In theory, however, there is a possibility of non-winning, so if it is not won, the game in [F31] time is continued.

[F32] per normal symbol during time reduction [F31] Even during the time reduction, if the game ball passes through the right start gate 21 in the “right-handed” flow as it is, it is won with almost one normal symbol change. Further, since the variation time is shortened (0.6 seconds) as described above, the game flow proceeds to the next stage in a very short time.

[F33] Variable start winning device operation The normal start (operating lottery) winning operation activates the variable start winning device 28 so that a winning can be generated at the start winning port 28a.

[F34] No win Similarly, even if no winning is made to the start winning opening 28a during the operation of the variable start winning device 28 for some reason (out of ball, clogged ball, etc.), the game flow is [ F31] Since the time is continued, there is no extreme penalty for the player.

[F35] Start opening prize [F31] If the winning to the start winning opening 28a occurs during the operation of the variable start winning apparatus 28 due to the "right-handed" flow in the short time, the game flow proceeds to the next stage.

[F36] Special Symbol Variation Similarly, a special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F37] Non-winning [F31] Regarding the special symbol (internal lottery) during the short time, the winning probability in the “low probability state” is one half (32768/65536), so there will be a chance of non-winning In that case, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. However, in this case, since the game flow continues for [F31], there is no extreme disadvantage for the player. In addition, since the number of times the time shortening function is activated is set to 100 times, even if one non-winning event occurs, the number of time reductions (99 times) still remains. Therefore, during [F31] time reduction, it is relatively easy to win a prize by internal lottery.

[F38] Probability change symbol 1 and 2 winning in short time And since the probability change ratio is 98% of the whole as described above, the probability change symbol is also selected with high frequency at the time of winning. [F31] When the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” from the time shortening, 10,000 times are added as the number of times of the time reduction function operation as described above.

[F39] Number of remaining limiters = 16
In this case, since [F31] the “low probability state” during the time reduction corresponds to the first probability variation winning, the “limiter count” is internally reset here (the limiter remaining) Number = 16). Furthermore, in this case, since it is a chance variation winning game, the following game flow will proceed.

[F18] Variable prize-winning device operation (during big role)
By winning the special symbol (internal lottery), the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation. [F31] The probability variation function activation flag is set and the time shortening function activation count is set to 10000 times for any of the cases where “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” falls under time reduction. Therefore, the game flow after the opening operation of the variable winning device 30 is actually changed (high probability time short: F19) is resumed (re-entry, return).

[Addition of a limiter by normal winning during a certain change]
In the above game flow, even if the “limiter count” is subtracted to some extent while repeating the loop of [F19] probability change, if “normal symbol 1” is won in the middle, the “limiter count” is thereby determined. Is reset, and the “limiter count” is reset to the maximum value again by winning “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (continuous count resetting trigger generation means).

  As a result, even if [F19] “Limiter count” during probability change is reaching the remaining 0, if “Normal design 1” is elected before that (selection ratio 2%), “Limiter” Since the “number of times” is reset, the game characteristic that the number of loops during [F19] probability change can be extended accordingly is realized.

[F40] Normal symbol 1 winning in time reduction Note that when the winning symbol corresponds to "normal symbol 1" following [F31] time reduction, 100 times is added as the number of times of the time shortening function operation. Accordingly, the game flow continues for [F31] time reduction after [F30] variable winning device operation.

  The above is the game flow that can occur before [F19] “Limiter count” reaches 0 remaining during [F19] probability change. On the other hand, as a result of repeating the above loop during [F19] probability change, when the remaining "limiter count" reaches zero, the following game flow is performed.

[Game flow when reaching the limiter]
FIG. 34 is a game flow diagram showing a game flow when the “limiter count” reaches the remaining zero. For example, in the case where [F19] variable start winning device is activated and [F24] start opening winning is generated per [F21] normal symbol in a state where [F19] “limiter count” reaches 0 remaining during [F19] probability change. Suppose.

[F41] Special Symbol Variation Similarly, a special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F42] Non-winning Regardless of the “limiter count”, the winning probability of the “high probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery) is about one-tenth (65535/65536). Does not occur. However, in the rare event that the internal lottery is not won, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. In this case, the game flow continues during [F19] probability change, but the “limiter count” remains 0. In addition, since the maximum number of times the time shortening function is activated is set to 10,000 times, the number of time reductions still remains even if a non-winning event occurs.

[F43] Normal symbol 1 winning [F19] The game flow is as follows when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1” while the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0. In this case, since it is not a probability variable symbol, the remaining number of “limiter times” is not particularly related, and 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated as it is.

[F44] Variable winning device activated
The variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). At this time, the remaining “limiter count” has reached 0, but the remaining limiter is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the control process of the main control CPU 72 as described above.

[Chance zone continuation]
In this case, the game flow returns to [F31] time shortening, and from there, again in the “time shortened state”, [F32] per normal symbol, [F33] variable start winning device operation, [F35] start opening winning, [F36] special A game flow such as symbol variation proceeds. Then, [F38] Probability change symbol 1 and 2 wins, [F39] Limiter remaining number = 16, the “limiter count” is reset, and the game flow again proceeds to [F19] Probability change.

[F45] Probability symbol 1 winning → Forced normal symbol 1
[F19] The game flow is as follows when the winning symbol corresponds to “probability symbol 1” with the remaining “limiter count” during probability variation reaching zero. In this case, since the remaining “limiter count” has already reached 0, it is not possible to select the probability variation symbol on the control process of the main control CPU 72, and the “normal symbol 1” is forcibly set as described above. Will be selected. In this case, the probability variation function activation flag is cleared, but 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, so the “time shortening state” continues.

[F44] Variable winning device activated
The variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). Similarly, the remaining “limiter count” has reached 0 at this time, but the remaining limiter count is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped.

[Chance zone continuation]
In this case as well, the game flow returns to [F31] time reduction, and from there, again in the “time reduction state”, [F32] per normal symbol, [F33] variable start winning device operation, [F35] start opening winning), [F36] A game flow such as special symbol variation proceeds. Then, [F38] Probability change symbol 1 and 2 wins, [F39] Limiter remaining number = 16, the “limiter count” is reset, and the game flow again proceeds to [F19] Probability change.

[F46] Probability symbol 2 winning → Forced normal 2
On the other hand, if the winning symbol is “probability variation 2” in the state where [F19] “limiter count” during probability variation has reached 0, the game flow is as follows. Also in this case, since the “limiter count” has already reached 0, it is not possible to select the probability variation symbol on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Then, “probability variation 2” is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 2” as described above. In this case, since the probability variation function operation flag is cleared and 0 (= no time reduction) is set as the time shortening function operation count, the time shortening function operation flag is also cleared.

[F47] Variable winning device operation
The variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). Similarly, the remaining “limiter count” has reached 0 at this time, but the remaining limiter count is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped.

[End of Chance Zone]
In this case, the game flow returns to [F1] normal game (normal game), and becomes a “non-time shortened state” and a “low probability state”.

[Summary of game flow]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game flow is once changed during [F19] probability change, the following features are clarified.
FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are conceptual diagrams showing the classification of game flow patterns in this embodiment. In the following, description will be given in order.

(1) Basic pattern (A) in FIG. 35: When the game flow is once changed to [F19] through the winning of “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2”, basically a very high rate ( With a selection ratio of 98%), positive variation wins occur continuously. Therefore, if the “limiter count” before the first (first) chance of winning the change is considered as 17 times (up to 17 consecutive times including the first) for convenience, the remaining 16 “limiter count” will remain in the second consecutive win. 1 time is subtracted from the next consecutive 3rd chance change win, and it is 15 times. Further, in the fourth consecutive positive variation winning, 1 is further subtracted to 14 times (not shown).

  After this, the “Limiter Count” is subtracted every time the chance variation wins continuously, and when the 17th consecutive chance change winning count occurs from the first count, 1 is subtracted there and the “Limiter Count” remains. Reach 0 times. In this case, since the probability variation symbol is forcibly changed to the normal symbol at the time of the next winning, the probability variation symbol is forcibly terminated after 17 consecutive times.

(2) Limiter addition pattern In FIG. 35 (B): In the basic pattern of (1) above, before the “limiter count” reaches the remaining 0, for example, the first limit is passed through the correct variation selection n times, Consider a case where “number of times” corresponds to “normal symbol 1” with (17−n) remaining (selection ratio 2%). In this case, 100 times are added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated.

  FIG. 35 (C): Then, after the completion of the major role, the time shifts to the above [F31] time shortening, so the normal symbol (acting lottery) wins and the next special symbol (internal lottery) wins the “probable variation symbol 1” or “ By winning (combination selection ratio 98%) with “probable variation 2”, the “number of limiters” is reset. In this case, the probability variation winning corresponds to the first time after the normal winning, and therefore the possibility of further 17 consecutive chances of winning the probability variation including the first time is newly generated. In this case, the “number of limiters” is the sum of the newly generated 17 times (excluding the remaining (17−n) times) (ie, n times).

  Such addition can be repeated, and even if the “limiter count” is reset, if the “limiter count” reaches “0” again after the reset, 100 times are added as the number of shortening function operations.

  In FIG. 35 (D): Then, since the transition to the above [F31] time shortening after the end of the major role, the normal symbol (working lottery) is won and the next special symbol (internal lottery) is selected. ”Or“ Probability variation 2 ”and winning (combination selection ratio 98%), the“ limiter count ”is reset there. Similarly, the probability variation winning in this case corresponds to the first time after the normal winning, so that the possibility of further 17 consecutive chance variation winnings including the first time has newly occurred.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the normal winning is performed before reaching the limiter during the [F19] accuracy change after selecting the first time limiter 17 times, the “limiter count” is reset (limiter) at the next time the accuracy change is selected. [F19] As a result of resuming the probability change, it is possible to realize a game as if the “limiter count” is added one after another. However, the “limiter count” is not increased in game control, and the normal symbol winning is always sandwiched between them, so that the gambling of the game is not extremely enhanced. Further, the number of times of addition is “17 times—the current number of remaining times”, and when the addition occurs, the number of remaining times is discarded.

(3) Continuation pattern after reaching the limiter (addition pattern after reaching the limiter)
In FIG. 36 (E): On the other hand, after selecting the first limiter 17 times, no addition before reaching the limiter occurs, and the “limiter count” reaches 0 remaining according to the basic pattern of (1) above. Even if it corresponds to the “probable variation 1” at the 18th time, it is forcibly changed to “normal design 1”.

  In FIG. 36 (F): However, since the “normal symbol 1” forcibly changed in this case is added 100 times as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, [F31] Migrate to Then, after winning the normal symbol (working lottery) and winning the next special symbol (internal lottery) with “probable variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (composite selection ratio 98%), the “limiter count” is set again there. Is done. The probability variation winning in this case corresponds to the first time after the end of the probability variation, and therefore, the possibility of 17 consecutive chance variation winnings including the first time is added.

  In this case, as the game flow, [F19] during the probability change is temporarily ended by reaching the limiter, but when the winning symbol at the time of reaching the limiter is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 1 (100 times short)”, [F31] The “limiter count” is newly set at the time of the next chance of winning from the short time, and [F19] is being resumed. In addition, if it happens to correspond to “normal symbol 1” after reaching the limiter, 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, and the time shifts to [F31] time reduction after the end of the major role. Therefore, the rate of shifting to [F31] time reduction after reaching the limiter is 57%, which combines the selection ratios of “normal symbol 1” and “probability variation 1”.

  In any case, by winning the “normal symbol with short time” after reaching the limiter, it is possible to realize a game characteristic as if the “number of limiters” seemed to be added (in this case, +17 times). Here too, the “variable number of limiters” is not increased in game control, but a forced normal symbol win (or pure normal symbol win) due to reaching the limiter in the meantime is generated. There is no increase in gambling.

(4) End pattern (G) in FIG. 36: On the other hand, if it corresponds to “probability variation 2” at the 18th consecutive time after reaching the limiter, it is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 2”. In this case, since the number of times the time shortening function is activated is not added to the “normal symbol 2” that is forcibly changed (0 times = no time saving), after the completion of the main role, [F1] shifts to the normal game, [ F19] The game under certainty ends.

  Next, some timing charts will be exemplified to explain the relationship between the launch position designation flag, the launch position designation display lamp, the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 and the like.

  FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the progress of the game corresponding to the normal symbol at the time of normal symbol first hit. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series.

[Initial]
In FIG. 37 (A): For example, the value of the normal game management status is “01H” at the beginning.
(B) in FIG. 37: The time reduction function is OFF.
In FIG. 37 (C): The normal symbol is changing.

In FIG. 37, (F): “Left-handed” in the non-time shortened state, the value of the launch position designation flag is “00H”.
In FIG. 37 (G): in the “left-handed” state, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is in the off state.
In FIG. 37 (H): In the “left-handed” state, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF.
In FIG. 37 (I): In the “left-handed” state, the firing position designation signal 2 is OFF.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 37 (C): When the winning result is obtained in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner after the normal symbol variation time has elapsed.
FIG. 37 (A): Thereby, the value of the normal game management status becomes “02H”.

[Time t2]
In FIG. 37 (A): When the normal symbol stop display time elapses, the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) waits for release, so the value of the normal game management status is “03H”.
In FIG. 37 (F): The value of the launch position designation flag becomes “03H” when the variable start winning device 28 is in the waiting state for release.
In FIG. 37, (G): In this case, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is lit.
In FIG. 37, (H) (I): The launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both ON.

[Time t3]
In FIG. 37 (D): When the waiting time for opening the variable start winning device 28 elapses, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is turned ON, and the variable start winning device 28 changes from the closed state to the open state. The variable start winning device 28 is opened for a predetermined opening time (about 6 seconds) (time t3 to time t4).
In FIG. 37A, the value of the normal game management status is “04H”.

[Time t3 to Time t4]
In FIG. 37 (E): During the opening time of the variable start winning device 28, a plurality (two in this example) of game balls are entering the start winning port 28a. In this case, a winning detection signal is input to the main control CPU 72 from the start winning opening switch 82 each time (waveforms with (1) and (2) in parentheses in the figure). Although not particularly illustrated, a special symbol lottery event occurs when a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, and the special symbol starts to change accordingly.

[Time t4]
In FIG. 37 (D): When the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 elapses, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is turned OFF, and the variable start winning device 28 returns from the open state to the closed state.
In FIG. 37 (A): As a result, the variable start winning device 28 ends the opening operation and is closed, and the value of the normal game management status becomes “05H”.

[Time t5]
In FIG. 37 (A): When the closing time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “06H”.

[Time t6]
In FIG. 37 (A): When the effective time after closing of the variable start winning device 28 (for example, about 2 seconds) ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “07H”.
In FIG. 37 (F): The value of the launch position designation flag becomes “00H” when the effective time after closing of the variable start winning device 28 has elapsed.
In FIG. 37 (G): In this case, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is turned off.
In FIG. 37, (H) (I): The launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both turned OFF.

[Time t7]
In FIG. 37 (A): When the end time (for example, about 2 seconds to 50 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “00H”, and the start of the next normal symbol variation starts. Permissible.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the time of normal symbol first hit, the effective time after the variable start winning device 28 is closed after the variable start winning device 28 starts waiting to be released (normal game management status “03H”). Until it is finished (normal game management status “06H”), the firing position designation display lamp 38e is lit, so that it is possible to appropriately suggest the player to make a right strike.

  On the other hand, at the time of normal symbol first hit, during the end time of the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary game management status “07H”), the variable start winning device 28 is not opened because the firing position designation display lamp 38e is turned off. It is possible to avoid suggesting a right strike to the player in the state.

  FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing a temporal change in the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol when the winning result is obtained in the special symbol lottery at the time of normal symbol first hit. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series.

[Initial]
FIG. 38 (A): For example, the value of the special game management status is “01H” at the beginning.
(B) in FIG. 38: The time reduction function is OFF.
(C) in FIG. 38: The special symbol is changing.

In FIG. 38, (F): “Left-handed” in the non-time shortened state, the value of the launch position designation flag is “00H”.
In FIG. 38 (G): In the “left-handed” state, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is in the off state.
In FIG. 38 (H): In the “left-handed” state, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF.
In FIG. 38 (I): In the “left-handed” state, the firing position designation signal 2 is OFF.

[Time t1]
FIG. 38 (C): When the winning result is obtained in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner when the variation time of the special symbol elapses thereafter.
FIG. 38 (A): As a result, the value of the special game management status becomes “02H”.

[Time t2]
FIG. 38 (A): When the special symbol stop display time has elapsed, the variable winning device 30 (special electric accessory) is waiting to be released, and the value of the special game management status is “03H”.
In FIG. 38 (F): The value of the launch position designation flag is “03H” when the variable winning device 30 is in the waiting state for opening.
In FIG. 38 (G): In this case, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is lit.
In FIG. 38, (H) (I): The firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are both turned ON.

[Time t3]
In FIG. 38 (D): after the elapse of the opening waiting time from time t2, the special electric accessory solenoid 90 is turned ON, and the variable winning device 30 is changed from the closed state to the opened state. Since the variable winning device 30 is opened twice corresponding to the big hit of 2 rounds, the first round is opened here. The variable winning device 30 is opened for a predetermined opening time (about 6 seconds) unless a game ball is entered.
In FIG. 38 (A): The value of the special game management status is “04H”.

[Time t3 to Time t5]
38 (D) and (E): Then, during the execution of the first opening operation by the variable winning device 30 (during the execution of the first round), one game ball enters the big winning opening 30b. ing. When the first round of the big hit game is terminated when the game ball enters the variable winning device 30, and the interval time between rounds thereafter passes, the special electric accessory solenoid 90 is turned on at time t4, The second round of the jackpot game is started. During the execution of the second releasing operation by the variable winning device 30 (during the execution of the second round), one game ball enters the big winning opening 30b. In this case, a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 to the main control CPU 72 each time (waveforms with (1) and (2) in parentheses in the figure).

[Time t5]
In FIG. 38 (A): When the opening time of the second round of the variable winning device 30 elapses or when one game ball has entered in the second round, the variable winning device 30 releases the second round. The operation is terminated, and the value of the special game management status becomes “05H”.
(D) in FIG. 38: At this time, the special electric accessory solenoid 90 is turned OFF, and the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

[Time t6]
38 (A): When the closing time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable winning device 30 ends, the value of the special game management status becomes “06H”.

[Time t7]
In FIG. 38 (A): When the effective time after closing the variable winning device 30 (for example, about 2 seconds) ends, the value of the special game management status becomes “07H”.

[Time t8]
38A: When the end time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable winning device 30 ends, the value of the special game management status becomes “00H”, and the start of the next special symbol variation is allowed.
In FIG. 38 (F): The value of the launch position designation flag becomes “00H” when the end time of the variable winning device 30 has elapsed. Note that “00H” here is “00H” based on the gaming state of the special symbol to the last, so “03H” is set as the value of the launch position designation flag based on other factors (ordinary symbol gaming state). There is also a case.
FIG. 38 (G): In this case, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is turned off.
In FIG. 38, (H) (I): The launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both OFF.
(B) in FIG. 38: When the end time of the variable winning device 30 ends, the operation of the variable winning device 30 ends, so the time shortening function is turned on. Since this timing chart shows a timing chart when a winning result is obtained in the special symbol lottery at the time of the first hit, the time reduction function is turned on at time t8.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol is won, the variable winning device 30 starts waiting for the opening (special game management status “03H”) until the end time of the variable winning device 30 ends ( During the special game management status “07H”), since the firing position designation display lamp 38e is turned on, it is possible to appropriately suggest the player to make a right strike.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is won, while the special symbol is changing or stopped (special game management status “01H”, “02H”), the variable winning device 30 is opened to turn off the launch position designation display lamp 38e. It is possible to avoid suggesting a right strike to the player in a state where the player is not.

  FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing a temporal change in the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol when a result of non-winning is obtained in the special symbol lottery at the time of normal symbol first hit.

[Initial]
In FIG. 39 (A): For example, the value of the special game management status is “01H” at the beginning.
(B) in FIG. 39: The time reduction function is OFF.
In FIG. 39 (C): The special symbol is changing.

In FIG. 39, (F): “Left-handed” in the non-time shortened state, the value of the launch position designation flag is “00H”.
In FIG. 39 (G): in the “left-handed” state, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is in the off state.
In FIG. 39 (H): In the “left-handed” state, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF.
In FIG. 39 (I): In the “left-handed” state, the firing position designation signal 2 is OFF.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 39 (C): When the winning result is not obtained in the special symbol lottery (when the result of non-winning is obtained), if the special symbol fluctuates after this, the special symbol will be lost. The display is stopped in a manner.
In FIG. 39 (A): As a result, the value of the special game management status becomes “02H”.

[Time t2]
39 (A): This timing chart shows a timing chart when the result of non-winning is obtained in the special symbol lottery at the time of normal symbol first hit, so the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed. However, it does not trigger the variable winning device 30 to operate. For this reason, when the special symbol stop display time has elapsed, the value of the special game management status becomes “00H”, and the start of the next special symbol variation is allowed.
In FIG. 39 (G): In this case, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is kept off.
In FIG. 39, (H) (I): Both the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 remain OFF.

[Time t3]
39 (A) and 39 (C): Then, for example, when a lottery opportunity for the special symbol lottery occurs at time t3, the special symbol lottery is executed, and the special symbol variation display is started. Further, during the change of the special symbol, the value of the special game management status is “01H”.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the special symbol is not won, the launch position is designated before the special symbol is changed, during the change, or during the stop (special game management status “00H”, “01H”, “02H”). Since the display lamp 38e is turned off, it is possible to avoid suggesting the player to make a right strike when the variable winning device 30 is not opened.

  FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the game progress status corresponding to the normal symbol before reaching the limiter (except for one before reaching the limiter) in the situation where the normal symbol memory exists. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series.

[Initial]
In FIG. 40 (A): For example, initially, the value of the normal game management status is “01H”.
(B) in FIG. 40: The time reduction function is ON.
In FIG. 40 (C): The normal symbol is changing.

In FIG. 40, (F): When the memory of the normal symbol exists in the time shortening state, it becomes “right-handed”, so the value of the launch position designation flag is “03H”.
In FIG. 40 (G): In the “right-handed” state, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is in a lighting state.
In FIG. 40 (H): In the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation signal 1 is ON.
In FIG. 40 (I): In the “right-handed” state, the firing position designation signal 2 is ON.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 40 (C): When the winning result is obtained in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner after the normal symbol variation time has elapsed.
40 (A): Thereby, the value of the normal game management status becomes “02H”.

[Time t2]
In FIG. 40 (A): When the normal symbol stop display time elapses, the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) waits for release, so the value of the normal game management status is “03H”.

[Time t3]
In FIG. 40 (D): When the opening waiting time of the variable start winning device 28 elapses, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is turned ON, and the variable start winning device 28 changes from the closed state to the open state. The variable start winning device 28 is opened for a predetermined opening time (about 6 seconds) (time t3 to time t4).
In FIG. 40 (A): The value of the normal game management status is “04H”.

[Time t3 to Time t4]
In FIG. 40 (E): During the opening time of the variable start winning device 28, a plurality (two in this example) of game balls are entering the start winning port 28a. In this case, a winning detection signal is input to the main control CPU 72 from the start winning opening switch 82 each time (waveforms with (1) and (2) in parentheses in the figure). Although not particularly illustrated, a special symbol lottery event occurs when a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, and the special symbol starts to change accordingly.

[Time t4]
In FIG. 40 (D): When the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 elapses, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is turned OFF, and the variable start winning device 28 returns from the open state to the closed state.
In FIG. 40 (A): As a result, the variable start winning device 28 ends the opening operation and is closed, and the value of the normal game management status becomes “05H”.

[Time t5]
In FIG. 40 (A): When the closing time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “06H”.

[Time t6]
In FIG. 40 (A): When the effective time after closing of the variable start winning device 28 (for example, about 2 seconds) ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “07H”.

[Time t7]
In FIG. 40 (A): When the end time (for example, about 10 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “00H” and the start of the next normal symbol variation is allowed.

[Time t8]
In FIG. 40 (A): In the example of the timing chart, since the memory of the normal symbol exists without interruption, the variation of the normal symbol is started at time t8, and the value of the normal game management status is “ 01H ".

  Thus, in this embodiment, as long as the memory of the normal symbol exists without interruption, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is lit, so that it is possible to appropriately suggest the player to make a right strike.

  FIG. 41 is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the game progress status corresponding to the normal symbol before reaching the limiter (except for one before reaching the limiter) in the situation where the normal symbol memory does not exist. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series.

[Initial]
In FIG. 41 (A): For example, the value of the normal game management status is initially “01H”.
In FIG. 41 (B): the time reduction function is ON.
In FIG. 41 (C): The normal symbol is changing. Except for this variation, it is assumed that there is no normal symbol memory.

In FIG. 41 (F): When the normal symbol is changing in the time shortening state, it becomes “right-handed”, so the value of the launch position designation flag is “03H”.
In FIG. 41 (G): in the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is in a lit state.
In FIG. 41 (H) (I): In the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both ON.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 41 (C): When the winning result is obtained in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner after the normal symbol variation time has elapsed.
41 (A): Thereby, the value of the normal game management status becomes “02H”.

In FIG. 41 (F): Since the symbol is “right-handed” when the normal symbol is stopped in the time shortening state, the value of the launch position designation flag is “03H”.
In FIG. 41 (G): in the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is in a lit state.
In FIG. 41 (H) (I): In the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both ON.

[Time t2]
In FIG. 41 (A): When the normal symbol stop display time elapses, the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) waits for release, so the value of the normal game management status is “03H”.

  In FIG. 41 (F): When the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) is operating in the time shortening state (except for the end time), it is “right-handed”. The value is “03H”. That is, since the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) is in operation while the value of the normal game management status is “03H” to “07H”, it is basically “right-handed”. Even if it is in operation, the exception is “left-handed” during the end time. However, these are limited to the case where there is no normal symbol memory, and when the normal symbol memory exists, it is “right-handed” as long as the time is shortened.

In FIG. 41 (G): in the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is in a lit state.
In FIG. 41 (H) (I): In the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both ON.

[Time t3]
In FIG. 41 (D): When the waiting time for opening the variable start winning device 28 elapses, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is turned ON, and the variable start winning device 28 changes from the closed state to the open state. The variable start winning device 28 is opened for a predetermined opening time (about 6 seconds) (time t3 to time t4).
In FIG. 41 (A): The value of the normal game management status is “04H”.

[Time t3 to Time t4]
In FIG. 41 (E): During the opening time of the variable start winning device 28, a plurality (two in this example) of game balls are entering the start winning port 28a. In this case, a winning detection signal is input to the main control CPU 72 from the start winning opening switch 82 each time (waveforms with (1) and (2) in parentheses in the figure). Although not particularly illustrated, a special symbol lottery event occurs when a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, and the special symbol starts to change accordingly.

[Time t4]
In FIG. 41 (D): When the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 elapses, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is turned OFF, and the variable start winning device 28 returns from the open state to the closed state.
In FIG. 41 (A): As a result, the variable start winning device 28 ends the opening operation and is closed, and the value of the normal game management status becomes “05H”.

[Time t5]
41 (A): When the closing time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “06H”.

[Time t6]
In FIG. 41 (A): When the effective time after closing of the variable start winning device 28 (for example, about 2 seconds) is ended, the value of the normal game management status becomes “07H”.
FIG. 41 (F): Also, when there is no ordinary symbol memory, the variable start winning device 28 is closed because the variable start winning device 28 is “left-handed” during the end time of the time shortening state. When the later effective time has elapsed, the value of the launch position designation flag becomes “00H”.
In FIG. 41 (G): In this case, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is turned off.
In FIG. 41, (H) (I): The launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both OFF.

[Time t7]
In FIG. 41 (A): When the end time (for example, about 10 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “00H”, and the start of the variation of the next normal symbol is allowed. However, in this timing chart example, since there is no normal symbol memory, the normal symbol changes until the next normal symbol lottery occurs (until the game ball passes the start gate). The waiting state is maintained.
In FIG. 41 (G): In this case, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is kept off.
In FIG. 41, (H) (I): Both the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 remain OFF.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when there is no normal symbol memory in the time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 is started after waiting for the variable start winning device 28 to be opened (normal game management status “03H”). Until the effective time after the device 28 is closed (normal game management status “06H”), the firing position designation display lamp 38e is lit, so that it is possible to appropriately suggest the player to make a right strike. .

  On the other hand, when there is no normal symbol memory in the time shortening state, during the end time of the variable start winning device 28 (normal game management status “07H”), the firing position designation display lamp 38e is turned off, so that the variable start It is possible to avoid suggesting the player to make a right strike when the winning device 28 is not opened (the variable start winning device 28 is unlikely to be opened).

  FIG. 42 is a timing chart in the case where the result of the probability variation symbol winning is obtained in the special symbol lottery one time before reaching the limiter in the situation where the normal symbol memory does not exist. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series.

[Initial]
In FIG. 42 (A): For example, initially, the value of the normal game management status is “01H”.
In FIG. 42 (B): the time reduction function is ON.
In FIG. 42 (C): The normal symbol is changing. Except for this variation, it is assumed that there is no normal symbol memory.

In FIG. 42 (F): When the normal symbol is changing in the time shortening state, it becomes “right-handed”, and therefore the value of the launch position designation flag is “03H”.
In FIG. 42 (G): in the “right-handed” state, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is in a lit state.
In FIG. 42, (H) (I): In the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both ON.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 42 (C): When the winning result is obtained in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner after the normal symbol variation time has elapsed.
42 (A): Thereby, the value of the normal game management status becomes “02H”.

In FIG. 42 (F): When the normal symbol is stopped in the time shortening state, it becomes “right-handed”, and therefore the value of the launch position designation flag is “03H”.
In FIG. 42 (G): in the “right-handed” state, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is in a lit state.
In FIG. 42, (H) (I): In the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both ON.

[Time t2]
42 (A): When the normal symbol stop display time elapses, the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) waits for release, and the value of the normal game management status becomes “03H”.

  In FIG. 42 (F): When the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) is operating in the time shortening state (except for the end time), it is “right-handed”. The value is “03H”.

In FIG. 42 (G): in the “right-handed” state, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is in a lit state.
In FIG. 42, (H) (I): In the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both ON.

[Time t3]
In FIG. 42 (D): When the opening waiting time of the variable start winning device 28 elapses, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is turned ON, and the variable start winning device 28 changes from the closed state to the open state. The variable start winning device 28 is opened for a predetermined opening time (about 6 seconds) (time t3 to time t4).
In FIG. 42 (A): The value of the normal game management status is “04H”.

[Time t3 to Time t4]
42E: In the middle of the opening time of the variable start winning device 28, a plurality (two in this example) of game balls are entering the start winning port 28a. In this case, a winning detection signal is input to the main control CPU 72 from the start winning opening switch 82 each time (waveforms with (1) and (2) in parentheses in the figure). Although not particularly illustrated, a special symbol lottery event occurs when a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, and the special symbol starts to change accordingly. In this special symbol lottery, the winning result is obtained, and the winning type corresponds to the probability variation symbol (“2 round probability variation symbol 1” or “2 round probability variation symbol 2”). If it does so, it will be right-handed under a special situation after the completion | finish of operation | movement of the variable winning apparatus 30. FIG. The “special situation” is as described above.

[Time t4]
In FIG. 42 (D): When the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 elapses, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is turned OFF, and the variable start winning device 28 returns from the open state to the closed state.
In FIG. 42 (A): As a result, the variable start winning device 28 ends the opening operation and is in the closed state, and the value of the normal game management status becomes “05H”.

[Time t5]
In FIG. 42 (A): When the closing time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “06H”.

[Time t6]
In FIG. 42 (A): When the effective time after closing of the variable start winning device 28 (for example, about 2 seconds) ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “07H”.
42 (F): In addition, when there is no normal symbol memory, the variable start winning device 28 is closed because the variable start winning device 28 is “left-handed” during the end time of the time shortening state. When the later effective time has elapsed, the value of the launch position designation flag becomes “00H”.
In FIG. 42 (G): In this case, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is turned off.
In FIG. 42, (H) (I): Both the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are OFF.

[Time t7]
In FIG. 42 (A): When the end time (for example, about 10 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “00H”, and the start of the variation of the next normal symbol is allowed. However, in this timing chart example, since there is no normal symbol memory, the normal symbol changes until the next normal symbol lottery occurs (until the game ball passes the start gate). The waiting state is maintained.
In FIG. 42 (G): In this case, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is kept off.
In FIG. 42, (H) (I): Both the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 remain OFF.

[Time t8]
In FIG. 42 (A): When a normal symbol lottery trigger occurs at time t8, the variation of the normal symbol is started, and the value of the normal game management status becomes “01H”.
In FIG. 42, (F): In this case, since it is right-handed under a special situation, the value of the launch position designation flag is “01H”.
In FIG. 42 (G): The launch position designation display lamp 38e is lit.
42 (H) (I): Since the value of the launch position designation flag is “01H”, the launch position designation signal 1 is in the ON state, but the launch position designation signal 2 is in the OFF state. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed under a special situation, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is turned on and the launch position designation signal 1 is turned on. Since 2 can be in an OFF state, it is possible to generate a launch position designation signal that meets the needs of the external device (test device).

  FIG. 43 is a timing chart in the case where the result of the normal symbol winning is obtained in the special symbol lottery one time before the limiter is reached in a situation where the memory of the normal symbol does not exist. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series.

[Initial]
43 (A): For example, the value of the normal game management status is “01H” at the beginning.
(B) in FIG. 43: The time reduction function is ON.
In FIG. 43 (C): The normal symbol is changing. Except for this variation, it is assumed that there is no normal symbol memory.

In FIG. 43 (F): When the normal symbol is changing in the time shortening state, it becomes “right-handed”, and therefore the value of the launch position designation flag is “03H”.
In FIG. 43 (G): in the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is in a lit state.
In FIG. 43, (H) (I): In the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both ON.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 43 (C): When the winning result is obtained in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner after the normal symbol variation time has elapsed.
In FIG. 43 (A): As a result, the value of the normal game management status becomes “02H”.

In FIG. 43 (F): When the normal symbol is stopped in the time shortening state, it is “right-handed”, so the value of the launch position designation flag is “03H”.
In FIG. 43 (G): in the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is in a lit state.
In FIG. 43, (H) (I): In the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both ON.

[Time t2]
43 (A): When the normal symbol stop display time elapses, the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) is in a waiting state for opening, so the value of the normal game management status is “03H”.

  43 (F): When the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) is operating in the time shortening state (except for the end time), it is “right-handed”. The value is “03H”.

In FIG. 43 (G): in the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is in a lit state.
In FIG. 43, (H) (I): In the “right-handed” state, the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both ON.

[Time t3]
In FIG. 43 (D): When the opening waiting time of the variable start winning device 28 elapses, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is turned ON, and the variable start winning device 28 changes from the closed state to the open state. The variable start winning device 28 is opened for a predetermined opening time (about 6 seconds) (time t3 to time t4).
43 (A): The value of the normal game management status is “04H”.

[Time t3 to Time t4]
In FIG. 43 (E): During the opening time of the variable start winning device 28, a plurality (two in this example) of game balls are entering the start winning port 28a. In this case, a winning detection signal is input to the main control CPU 72 from the start winning opening switch 82 each time (waveforms with (1) and (2) in parentheses in the figure). Although not particularly illustrated, a special symbol lottery event occurs when a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, and the special symbol starts to change accordingly. In this special symbol lottery, the winning result is obtained, and the winning type corresponds to the normal symbol (“2 round normal symbol 1”). Then, after the variable winning device 30 is activated, it becomes normal right-handed (right-handed except under special circumstances).

[Time t4]
In FIG. 43 (D): When the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 elapses, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is turned OFF, and the variable start winning device 28 returns from the open state to the closed state.
43 (A): Thereby, the variable start winning device 28 ends the opening operation and is closed, and the value of the normal game management status becomes “05H”.

[Time t5]
43 (A): When the closing time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “06H”.

[Time t6]
43 (A): When the effective time (for example, about 2 seconds) after closing of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “07H”.
FIG. 43 (F): Also, when there is no normal symbol memory, the variable start winning device 28 is closed because the variable start winning device 28 is “left-handed” during the end time of the time shortening state. When the later effective time has elapsed, the value of the launch position designation flag becomes “00H”.
In FIG. 43 (G): In this case, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is turned off.
In FIG. 43, (H) (I): the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both OFF.

[Time t7]
43 (A): When the end time (for example, about 10 seconds) of the variable start winning device 28 ends, the value of the normal game management status becomes “00H” and the start of the next normal symbol variation is allowed. However, in this timing chart example, since there is no normal symbol memory, the normal symbol changes until the next normal symbol lottery occurs (until the game ball passes the start gate). The waiting state is maintained.
In FIG. 43, (G): In this case, the firing position designation display lamp 38e remains off.
In FIG. 43, (H) (I): Both the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 remain OFF.

[Time t8]
In FIG. 43 (A): When a normal symbol lottery trigger occurs at time t8, the variation of the normal symbol is started, and the value of the normal game management status becomes “01H”.
In FIG. 43, (F): In this case, since it is normal right-handed (right-handed except under special circumstances), the value of the launch position designation flag is “03H”.
In FIG. 43 (G): the firing position designation display lamp 38e is lit.
In FIG. 43, (H) (I): the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both turned on.

  In this way, in this embodiment, even if it is a right-handed state under a special situation, the winning type corresponds to a normal symbol ("2 round normal symbol 1") and a normal right-handed (except under a special situation) Right-handed), the launch position designation display lamp 38e can be turned on, and the launch position designation signals 1 and 2 can be turned on, so that the needs of the external device (test equipment) can be met. A launch position designation signal can be generated.

  FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing a temporal change in the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery at the time of reaching the limiter corresponds to the symbol with time reduction. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series. In the example of the timing chart, it is assumed that there is no normal symbol memory.

[Initial]
44A: For example, the value of the special game management status is “01H” at the beginning.
In FIG. 44 (B): the time reduction function is ON.
(C) in FIG. 44: The special symbol is changing.

44 (F): When there is no normal symbol memory and the special symbol is changing in the time shortening state, in principle, “left-handed” (the value of the launch position designation flag is “00H”). In this case, however, the right-handed position under a special situation is used, so the value of the launch position designation flag is “01H”.
In FIG. 44 (G): In this case, the firing position designation display lamp 38e is lit.
44 (H) (I): Since the value of the launch position designation flag is “01H”, the launch position designation signal 1 is in the ON state, but the launch position designation signal 2 is in the OFF state. .

[Time t1]
44 (C): When the winning result is obtained in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner when the variation time of the special symbol elapses thereafter. Here, it is assumed that it corresponds to a symbol with a short time (selection of pure “2 round normal symbol 1” or forced selection of “2 round normal symbol 1” from “2 round probability variation 1”).
44 (A): As a result, the value of the special game management status becomes “02H”.

[Time t2]
In FIG. 44 (A): When the special symbol stop display time has elapsed, the variable winning device 30 (special electric accessory) waits for release, so the value of the special game management status becomes “03H”.
In FIG. 44 (F): The value of the launch position designation flag becomes “03H” when the variable winning device 30 is in the waiting state for release.
(G) in FIG. 44: In this case, the lighting state of the launch position designation display lamp 38e is maintained.
44 (H) (I): The firing position designation signal 1 is maintained in the ON state, and the firing position designation signal 2 is turned on at this timing.

[Time t3]
(D) in FIG. 44: After the elapse of the opening waiting time from time t2, the special electric accessory solenoid 90 is turned on, and the variable winning device 30 changes from the closed state to the opened state. Since the variable winning device 30 is opened twice corresponding to the big hit of 2 rounds, the first round is opened here. The variable winning device 30 is opened for a predetermined opening time (about 6 seconds) unless a game ball is entered.
In FIG. 44 (A): The value of the special game management status is “04H”.

[Time t3 to Time t5]
44 (D) and (E): During execution of the first opening operation by the variable winning device 30 (during execution of the first round), one game ball enters the big winning opening 30b. ing. When the first round of the big hit game is terminated when the game ball enters the variable winning device 30, and the interval time between rounds thereafter passes, the special electric accessory solenoid 90 is turned on at time t4, The second round of the jackpot game is started. During the execution of the second releasing operation by the variable winning device 30 (during the execution of the second round), one game ball enters the big winning opening 30b. In this case, a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 to the main control CPU 72 each time (waveforms with (1) and (2) in parentheses in the figure).

[Time t5]
44A: When the opening time of the second round of the variable winning device 30 elapses or when one game ball has entered in the second round, the variable winning device 30 releases the second round. The operation is terminated, and the value of the special game management status becomes “05H”.
44 (D): At this time, the special electric accessory solenoid 90 is turned OFF, and the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

[Time t6]
44 (A): When the closing time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable winning device 30 ends, the value of the special game management status becomes “06H”.

[Time t7]
In FIG. 44 (A): When the effective time after closing of the variable winning device 30 (for example, about 2 seconds) ends, the value of the special game management status becomes “07H”.

[Time t8]
44A: When the end time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable winning device 30 ends, the value of the special game management status becomes “00H”, and the start of the next special symbol variation is allowed.
44 (F): The value of the launch position designation flag becomes “00H” when the end time of the variable winning device 30 has elapsed.
44G: In this case, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is turned off.
In FIG. 44, (H) (I): the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are both OFF.
44B: When the end time of the variable winning device 30 ends, the operation of the variable winning device 30 ends, so the time shortening function is turned on.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when switching from right-handed under special circumstances (launching position designation flag “01H”) to normal right-handing (launching position designation flag “03H”), the firing position designation display is performed. Since the lighting state of the lamp 38e is maintained, it is possible to suggest the player to make a right strike without being aware of the situation of the right strike under a special situation.

  If the special symbol lottery at the time of reaching the limiter corresponds to a symbol with time reduction, the time reduction function is turned on after the operation of the variable winning device 30 is completed, but there is no normal symbol memory. Indicates a right strike to the player in a state where the variable winning device 30 is not opened (a state where the variable winning device 30 is unlikely to open) by turning off the firing position designation display lamp 38e. You can avoid that.

  FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing a temporal change in the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery when reaching the limiter corresponds to the symbol without time. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series. In the example of the timing chart, it is assumed that there is no normal symbol memory.

[Initial]
45A: For example, the value of the special game management status is “01H” at the beginning.
(B) in FIG. 45: The time reduction function is ON.
(C) in FIG. 45: The special symbol is changing.

In FIG. 45 (F): When there is no normal symbol memory and the special symbol is changing in the time shortening state, in principle, “left-handed” (the value of the launch position designation flag is “01H”) In this case, however, the right-handed position under a special situation is used, so the value of the launch position designation flag is “01H”.
In FIG. 45 (G): the firing position designation display lamp 38e is lit.
45 (H) (I): Since the value of the launch position designation flag is “01H”, the launch position designation signal 1 is in the ON state, but the launch position designation signal 2 is in the OFF state. .

[Time t1]
In FIG. 45 (C): When the winning result is obtained in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner when the variation time of the special symbol elapses thereafter. Here, it is assumed that the symbol corresponds to the no-short-time symbol (the forced selection of “two-round normal symbol 2” from “two-round probability variable symbol 2”).
In FIG. 45, (A): As a result, the value of the special game management status becomes “02H”.

[Time t2]
In FIG. 45 (A): When the special symbol stop display time elapses, the variable winning device 30 (special electric accessory) is in a waiting state for opening, and the value of the special game management status is “03H”.
In FIG. 45 (F): The value of the launch position designation flag becomes “03H” when the variable winning device 30 is in the waiting state for opening.
(G) in FIG. 45: In this case, the lighting state of the launch position designation display lamp 38e is maintained.
In FIG. 45, (H) (I): the launch position designation signal 1 is maintained in the ON state, and the launch position designation signal 2 is turned on at this timing.

[Time t3]
In FIG. 45 (D): After the elapse of the opening waiting time from time t2, the special electric accessory solenoid 90 is turned ON, and the variable winning device 30 is changed from the closed state to the opened state. Since the variable winning device 30 is opened twice corresponding to the big hit of 2 rounds, the first round is opened here. The variable winning device 30 is opened for a predetermined opening time (about 6 seconds) unless a game ball is entered.
In FIG. 45 (A): The value of the special game management status is “04H”.

[Time t3 to Time t5]
45 (D) and (E): Then, during the execution of the first opening operation by the variable winning device 30 (during the execution of the first round), one game ball enters the big winning opening 30b. ing. When the first round of the big hit game is terminated when the game ball enters the variable winning device 30, and the interval time between rounds thereafter passes, the special electric accessory solenoid 90 is turned on at time t4, The second round of the jackpot game is started. During the execution of the second releasing operation by the variable winning device 30 (during the execution of the second round), one game ball enters the big winning opening 30b. In this case, a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 to the main control CPU 72 each time (waveforms with (1) and (2) in parentheses in the figure).

[Time t5]
45 (A): When the opening time of the second round of the variable winning device 30 elapses or when one game ball has entered in the second round, the variable winning device 30 releases the second round. The operation is terminated, and the value of the special game management status becomes “05H”.
In FIG. 45 (D): At this time, the special electric accessory solenoid 90 is turned OFF, and the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

[Time t6]
45 (A): When the closing time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable winning device 30 ends, the value of the special game management status becomes “06H”.

[Time t7]
45 (A): When the effective time after closing of the variable winning device 30 (for example, about 2 seconds) ends, the value of the special game management status becomes “07H”.

[Time t8]
45 (A): When the end time (for example, about 2 seconds) of the variable winning device 30 ends, the value of the special game management status becomes “00H”, and the start of the next special symbol variation is allowed.
In FIG. 45 (F): The value of the launch position designation flag becomes “00H” when the end time of the variable winning device 30 has elapsed.
(G) in FIG. 45: In this case, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is turned off.
In FIG. 45, (H) (I): The launch position designation signals 1 and 2 are both OFF.
In FIG. 45 (B): When the end time of the variable winning device 30 ends, the operation of the variable winning device 30 ends, so the time shortening function is maintained in the OFF state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when switching from right-handed under special circumstances (launching position designation flag “01H”) to normal right-handing (launching position designation flag “03H”), the firing position designation display is performed. Since the lighting state of the lamp 38e is maintained, it is possible to suggest the player to make a right strike without being aware of the situation of the right strike under a special situation.

  In addition, when the special symbol lottery at the time of reaching the limiter corresponds to the symbol without time, the variable winning device 30 is opened because the time shortening function is OFF after the operation of the variable winning device 30 is completed. It is possible to avoid suggesting a right strike to the player in a state where the player is not.

[Summary of launch position designation signals]
FIG. 46 is a conceptual diagram showing the state of the launch position designation signal together with the game flow pattern in the present embodiment. In the following, description will be given in order.

(1) Basic pattern (A) in FIG. 46: When the game flow is once changed to [F19] probability change after winning the “probability change symbol 1” or “probability change symbol 2”, basically a very high rate ( With a selection ratio of 98%), positive variation wins occur continuously. In this case, it is assumed that no extra time is generated in the chance zone, and the symbol corresponds to a timeless symbol when reaching the limiter. Further, in the time shortening state, it is assumed that the normal symbol memory exists without interruption.

In FIG. 46, (B): In this case, the launch position designation signal 1 remains on until the end time of the variable winning device 30 at the time of reaching the limiter ends after shifting to the time reduction state.
In FIG. 46 (C): On the other hand, the launch position designation signal 2 remains ON until the end time of the variable prize winning device 30 by winning the probability variable symbol winning one time before reaching the limiter after shifting to the time reduction state. Then, after the end time of the variable winning device 30 by winning the probability variation symbol winning one time before the limiter is reached, the OFF state is maintained until the operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of reaching the limiter is started. The variable winning device 30 is turned on until the end time of the variable winning device 30 when the limiter is reached after the operation of the variable winning device 30 is started.

(2) Addition pattern of limiter In FIG. 46 (D): In the basic pattern of (1) above, when the “limiter count” reaches the remaining one, it corresponds to “normal symbol 1” (selection ratio 2%) think of. In this case, 100 times are added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated.

  In FIG. 46 (E): Then, since the transition to the above [F31] time shortening after the end of the major role, after passing the normal symbol (actuation lottery) winning, the next special symbol (internal lottery) “probable variation symbol 1” or “ By winning (combination selection ratio 98%) with “probable variation 2”, the “number of limiters” is reset. In this case, the probability variation winning corresponds to the first time after the normal winning, and therefore the possibility of further 17 consecutive chances of winning the probability variation including the first time is newly generated.

In FIG. 46, (F): In this case, the launch position designation signal 1 remains on until the end time of the variable winning device 30 at the time of reaching the limiter ends after shifting to the time reduction state.
In FIG. 46 (G): On the other hand, the launch position designation signal 2 remains ON until the end time of the variable winning device 30 by winning the probability variable symbol winning one time before reaching the limiter after the transition to the time reduction state ends. Then, after the end time of the variable winning device 30 by winning the probability variation symbol winning one time before the limiter is reached, the OFF state is maintained until the operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of reaching the limiter is started. The variable winning device 30 is turned on until the end time of the variable winning device 30 when the limiter is reached after the operation of the variable winning device 30 is started.

  For this reason, the firing position designation signal 2 is not turned off when the end time of the variable winning device 30 by the normal symbol winning one time before the limiter is reached is ended. Thus, the launch position designation signal 2 is not necessarily turned off one time before reaching the limiter, but is turned off only when a normal symbol is won one time before reaching the limiter.

  The outline of the prominent patterns (1) to (4) of the game flow by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is as described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In particular, the limiter addition pattern (2) above ( Regarding the continuation pattern after reaching the limiter of 3), the profit of the player increases due to the occurrence of each game flow. However, the above patterns (2) and (3) are only performed on the control processing by the main control CPU 72, and it is difficult for the player to perceive the flow directly.

  Of course, if the display mode of the special symbol display device 34 is carefully observed, it is possible for the player to confirm what winning symbol the game corresponds to during the game. However, the special symbol display device 34 itself is a 7-segment LED, and the display mode of any winning symbol is somewhat symbolic (for example, “巳”, “self”, “L”, “¬”, “Γ”). Therefore, it is difficult to instantaneously determine the type of winning symbol from such a display mode.

  Further, the “limiter count” is an internal control variable, and is not displayed on the game state display device 38 in particular, so that the “limiter count” is added during the game, It is difficult for the player to directly know the control information such as that the “limiter count” has reached the remaining 0, or that the time limit has been reached and the normal symbol has been won.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an effect technique is used to easily convey to the player that the game flow is progressing along the patterns (1) to (4). Hereinafter, the production technique employed in the present embodiment will be described with some examples. Note that these are merely examples, and there is no particular limitation on the contents of the effect design and the effect image.

[Normal design off-line production]
First, FIG. 47 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect executed when [F2] normal symbol is not won. This effect example corresponds to normal symbol variation display and stop display, and is specifically an example of variation display effect and stop display effect (result display effect) by the effect symbol. Of these, the variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects that are performed during the period from when the normal symbol starts variable display to when it is stopped and displayed (including the fixed stop). In addition, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the operation lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. As described above, since the normal symbol display device 33 itself is a lighting / flashing display using two LEDs, it does not have an appealing appearance. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 basically performs a variable display effect and a stop display effect using the effect symbols. Also, since the normal symbol is only displayed in a simple manner (for example, one upper lamp is lit), the player can determine whether or not the winning symbol is selected unless it is a stop display effect based on the effect symbol. Hard to notice. On the contrary, this means that the player basically has a tendency to judge the result of the operation lottery from the contents of the production, and it can be said that the production plays an important role in the game flow.

  Here, in this embodiment, four types of effect symbols are prepared as effect symbols. The four types of breakdowns are a pseudo-designed symbol corresponding to the normal symbol, a true-designed symbol corresponding to the regular symbol, a fourth symbol corresponding to the regular symbol, and a special symbol corresponding to the special symbol.

[Pseudo production design (character design, main production design)]
The pseudo effect design is a pseudo effect design corresponding to the normal design, for example, an effect design composed of a pattern imitating a female character (reference symbol GE). The pseudo effect symbol includes two effects, a left effect symbol and a right effect symbol. These are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The pseudo effect design is not attached with a numerical image or the like indicating the order of arrangement, and each design is identified by the design of the clothes worn by the female character.

  The symbol sequence composed of the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left area and the right area on the screen. Note that the pseudo effect design may not be a variation display mode that flows in the vertical direction, but may be a variation display mode that rotates in the left-right direction.

[True production design]
A true effect symbol is an original effect symbol corresponding to a normal symbol, and is composed of, for example, a numeric image and a shape image (reference symbol SE). The true effect design includes the upper effect design, the middle effect design, and the lower effect design, which are displayed in small size along the top, middle, and bottom on the lower right screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The

  Here, the upper production symbol and the middle production symbol are constituted by, for example, images of arithmetic numbers “1” to “9”, while the lower production symbol is constituted by an image of a shape instead of an arithmetic number. Yes. The symbol sequence composed of the upper, middle, and lower effect symbols is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the right end area on the screen.

[Figure 4]
The fourth symbol is an effect symbol corresponding to the normal symbol, and is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (reference symbol FZ). The fourth symbol FZ is a “fourth effect symbol” that follows the above-mentioned upper, middle, and lower effect symbols, and is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the normal symbol. Note that the fourth symbol FZ is a simple mark (for example, a rhombus “◇” figure) with a color, and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing its display color.

  In addition, the fourth symbol FZ is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, a rhombus figure of white display color) corresponding to the deviation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the operation lottery is “winning” rather than “out of”, the fourth symbol FZ is stopped and displayed in a corresponding manner (for example, red display color).

[Special design effects]
The special symbol effect symbol is an effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol, and is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (reference symbol TZ). The special symbol effect symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner during the variation display of the special symbols. The special design effects are composed of simple marks (for example, images with circles “◯” and hyphens “-”). Can be expressed.

In addition, the special symbol effect symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the loss (for example, an image of a hyphen “-”). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the operation lottery is actually “winning” instead of “out of”, the special design effect symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, a circle “◯” image) corresponding thereto.
In addition, the detail of each structure symbol which comprises these effect symbols is mentioned later.

  FIG. 47 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect image corresponding to normal symbol variation display and stop display. In addition, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect performed using each effect symbol is shown for the variation of the normal symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects that are performed from the time when a normal symbol starts variable display to when it is stopped (including a fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the operation lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
47 (A): For example, in a state before the normal symbol starts to change (a state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of two pseudo effect symbols GE is present in the center portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed large. In addition, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in an out-of-phase manner (“1”-“1”-“×”). In accordance with this, the fourth symbol FZ corresponding to the normal symbol is also stopped and displayed in an off-side manner (white display color rhombus figure). At this point, the special symbol does not change, but the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol is stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner (“−”).

  In addition, a marker (indicated by reference numeral M1 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of a normal symbol is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. This marker M1 represents the number of operating memories of the normal symbol corresponding to the number of each display (the number of operating memories by the normal symbol operating memory lamp 33), and the displayed number is linked to the change in the number of operating memories during the game. Increase or decrease. In addition, for the marker M1, the marker M1 corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination. In the example shown in the figure, all the four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of stored normal symbols is four (stored number display effect execution means).

  Further, an effect object is displayed near the center of the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (reference numeral Y1). In the example shown in the figure, the effect object is an image imitating a crystal and is usually used to indicate that the change of the symbol has ended. For this reason, a special effect is not executed for the effect object while the normal symbol changes. Although not specifically illustrated, by using the effect object as a notice effect (for example, by changing the display color of the effect object or changing the effect object) Expectation may be suggested.

[Variable display production start]
47B: For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the variable display effect is started by scrolling the two pseudo effect symbols GE on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the variable display effect is started such that the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol scroll in the vertical direction within the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. In the figure, the fluctuating display of the pseudo effect design is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the image (background image) that is the background of the pseudo effect symbol is easily visible in the display screen at this time. It is displayed.

  The background image in this case is, for example, a coastal background image using images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” as a motif. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is inactive and the probability fluctuation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  In addition, during the variation display of the effect symbol, the true effect symbol SE is displayed in a variable manner at the right end of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol FZ of the normal symbol is also displayed in a variable manner.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, since the number of memory of the normal symbol is decreased by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. For example, if there are four operating memory numbers so far, only one of the oldest (oldest) memory number displays in the marker M1 is hidden, and an effect consumed by the operation lottery is also performed. As a result, the player can be informed of the fact that the number of working memories related to the normal symbol has decreased.

  Then, since the first working memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (here, leftward) by one each. Production is being performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Left effect symbol stop]
47 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the left effect symbol expressed by the female character wearing a star dress is stopped. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Right effect design stop, stop display effect]
(D) in FIG. 47: The right effect design stops changing in synchronization with the stop display of the normal design (not necessarily at the same time). If the result of the current operation lottery is non-winning and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, each display design is similarly stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. . In this example, the production pattern expressed by the female character wearing a floral dress is stopped.

  In the present embodiment, for the pseudo-design symbol GE, when a female character wearing a dress with the same pattern is stopped to the left and right, it reaches a reach state and develops into a subsequent reach effect. On the other hand, if a female character wearing a dress with a different pattern is stopped to the left or right, the current variation corresponds to “out of”. For this reason, as a player, the first point of interest is whether or not the effect pattern by the female character of the same pattern is stopped to the left and right.

  In the example shown in the figure, since the production pattern by a female character wearing a dress with a different pattern has stopped to the left and right, it has been determined that a reach state has not already occurred at this point, and this fluctuation is non-reach (normally ) It is almost clear that it is a fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, a female character wearing a star-shaped one-piece pattern after the production pattern once represented by a female character wearing a floral one-piece pattern has stopped. The production symbol expressed by is stopped, and it is developed to reach.

  At this time, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in a mode ("2"-"5"-"x") corresponding to the deviation. In addition, the fourth symbol FZ is also stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, a rhombus with a white display color) corresponding to the deviation.

[Assistance production]
Further, when the variation of the normal symbol is finished, an auxiliary effect is executed. The auxiliary effect is an effect for teaching auxiliary that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed.
In the illustrated example, an effect in which the effect object Y1 shines brilliantly (an effect in which an image of light is displayed) is executed, and an effect in which a stop display sound of a normal symbol is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 is executed. (Reference symbol Y2). Also in the following description, when the change of the normal symbol is finished, the auxiliary effect is executed.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the operation lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for non-winning, but at the time of winning (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, each effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner in the stop display effect. .

[Details of pseudo-directive design]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining details of the pseudo effect design.
In FIG. 48, eight effect symbols (reference symbols A1 to A8) constituting the left symbol row and two effect symbols constituting the right symbol row (see reference symbols) of the two symbol sequences of the pseudo effect symbols (refer to FIG. 48). Reference numerals B1 to B8) are shown in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, a configuration example of the pseudo effect design will be described with reference numerals as appropriate.

The pseudo effect symbol is composed of eight effect symbols composing the left symbol sequence and eight effect symbols composing the right symbol sequence, and is composed of a total of 16 effect symbols.
Each production pattern is basically represented by a female character wearing a one-piece, but each person is represented differently, showing the difference in hairstyle, facial ornaments, etc. Thus, individuality (characteristic personality) as each character is expressed there.

Here, each of the 16 female characters has individuality, and among them, the characters wearing one piece with the same pattern form a pair.
For example, since the female characters expressed by the production design A1 and the production design B1 are both wearing a white plain dress, the two are paired. Then, during the execution of the variable display effect, the reach effect is executed if the two persons who make the pair are aligned.

In the actual variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling the left and right symbol strings.
For the left symbol row, the effect symbol A2 is displayed after the effect symbol A1 is displayed, and the effect symbol A3 is displayed after the effect symbol A2 is displayed. Then, after the final effect symbol A8 is displayed, the effect symbol A1 is displayed again, and such display is repeatedly executed in a loop.
Similarly, the effect symbol B2 is displayed after the effect symbol B1 is displayed, and the effect symbol B3 is displayed after the effect symbol B2 is displayed. Then, after the final effect symbol B8 is displayed, the effect symbol B1 is displayed again, and such display is repeatedly executed in a loop.

  It should be noted that various types of image data that are components of such an effect symbol are stored in advance in, for example, the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) (effect symbol element defining means).

[Details of production design of normal design, 4th design of regular design, production design of special design]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the details of the effect symbol of the normal symbol, the fourth symbol of the normal symbol, and the effect symbol of the special symbol.
In the left column of the figure, a normal symbol effect symbol (true effect symbol), a normal symbol fourth symbol, and a special symbol effect symbol are shown.

[Directing design of normal design]
The effect symbol of the normal symbol is a symbol expressing a stop display mode by a combination of a plurality of component symbols. For example, if the combination of the constituent symbols is “7”-“7”-“smile mark”, it is a hit.
In addition, for a plurality of constituent symbols, a symbol sequence corresponding to the upper effect symbol and the middle effect symbol is displayed as a numeric image, and a symbol sequence corresponding to the lower effect symbol is displayed as a shape image.

  The effect symbol of the normal symbol is displayed as an image that is displayed during stoppage (during the stop display effect), and any of the images “1” to “9” is displayed for the upper / middle effect symbol, and the lower effect symbol Displays an image of “X”. Here, the images of “1” to “9” and the image of “X (x)” are non-winning images used for the variable display effect and the stop display effect. However, the “7” image is also used as the winning image.

  In addition, as for the effect design of the normal design, the image of “7” is displayed for both the upper and middle effect designs as the images displayed during the stoppage at the time of hitting (stop display effect), The “mark” image is displayed. Here, the image of “7” and the image of “smile mark” are winning images used for the variable display effect and the stop display effect.

  Furthermore, as for the effect design of the normal design, the images of “1” to “9” are displayed in order as the images displayed during the change (during the change display effect), and the images of “1” to “9” are displayed in order. An image of “X”, an image of “smile mark”, an image of “rhombus (◇)”, and an image of “star (☆)” are displayed in order. Here, the image of “rhombus (◇)” and the image of “star” (☆) are dedicated images for variable display that are used for the variable display effect and not the stop display effect.

[Normal design 4th design]
The 4th symbol of the normal symbol is a symbol that expresses the stop display mode by the shape, pattern or color of the constituent symbol, or a combination thereof. For example, it is a hit when the 4th symbol is stopped and displayed with an image of “red display color diamond (形)”.

  In the normal symbol, the fourth symbol, an image of “white rhombus (画像)” is displayed as an image displayed during stoppage (during stop display effect). Here, the image of “white display color rhombus (◇)” is a non-winning image used for the variable display effect and the stop display effect.

  Also, the fourth symbol of the normal symbol is displayed as an image of “red display color diamond (菱)” as an image displayed during stoppage (during stop display effect). Here, the “red display color rhombus (」) ”is a winning image used for a change display effect and a stop display effect.

Furthermore, the 4th symbol of the normal symbol is an image that is displayed during the change (during the change display effect), such as an image of “white rhombus (◇)”, an image of “red rhombus (◇)”, "Green display color diamond (◇)", "Blue display color diamond (◇)" image, "Orange display color diamond (◇)" image, "Purple display color diamond (◇)" The images “black diamond (◇)” are displayed in order.
Here, an image of “green rhombus (◇)”, “blue rhombus (◇)”, “orange rhombus (◇)”, “purple rhombus (◇)” The image of “)” and the image of “black rhombus (◇)” are the variable display-dedicated images that are used for the variable display effect and not the stop display effect.

  In the present embodiment, the winning image and the non-winning image are defined as images of the same shape for the fourth symbol of the normal symbol (since both are images of “◇”), the winning image The number (5) of variable display dedicated images is defined more than the number (2) obtained by adding the number of images (1) and the number of non-winning images (1).

  For the 4th design of the normal design, the winning image and the non-winning image are images of the same shape (both are “◇” images), so for the player, the winning image and the non-winning image Difficult to distinguish. If it is difficult to distinguish between the winning image and the non-winning image, the possibility of misrecognition of misappreciating the effect design increases. For this reason, the effect of preventing misidentification can be enhanced by setting a relatively large number of introductions of the dedicated display for variation display for a design with a high possibility of misperception.

[Special design effects]
The special design effect design is a design that represents a stop display mode by the shape, pattern or color of the constituent design, or a combination thereof. For example, it is a hit when the special symbol effect symbol is stopped and displayed as an image of “circle” (◯).

  The special symbol effect symbol is displayed as a “hyphen (−)” image as an image displayed during stoppage (during stop display effect). Here, the image of “hyphen (−)” is a non-winning image used for the change display effect and the stop display effect.

  In addition, the special symbol effect symbol is displayed as an image of “circle (◯)” as an image displayed during stoppage at the time of hitting (during stop display effect). Here, the image of “circle (◯)” is a winning image used for the change display effect and the stop display effect.

  Furthermore, the special symbol design symbols are “hyphen (−)” images, “circle (◯)” images, and “triangle (△)” images that are displayed during the change (during the change display effect). Images and “square (□)” images are displayed in order. Here, the “triangle (Δ)” image and the “square (□)” image are variable display-dedicated images that are used for the variable display effect and not the stop display effect.

  In the present embodiment, the winning image (for example, “◯” image) and the non-winning image (for example, “-” image) are defined as images of different shapes for the special symbol effect symbol. The same number (2) of variable display dedicated images (for example, “Δ” images), and the number (2) obtained by adding the number of images for use (1) and the number of non-winning images (1), and “□” image).

  As for the special design effect design, the winning image (for example, “◯” image) and the non-winning image (for example, “-” image) are images having different shapes. Intuitively distinguish between non-winning images. The fact that it is easy to distinguish between the winning image and the non-winning image also reduces the misperception that the production symbol is mistaken. For this reason, with respect to production designs with few misidentifications, the image capacity can be reduced by limiting the number of introduction of the variable display dedicated images to the minimum necessary number.

  In any case, in the present embodiment, the variable display dedicated image (the image displayed in the bold broken frame) is an image that is used for the variable display effect but is not used for the stop display effect. That is, the variable display-dedicated image is an image that appears only during the fluctuation, and is not an image that appears during the stop display.

  Various image data as components of such effect symbols are stored in advance in, for example, the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) (effect symbol element defining means).

[Normal design per design]
Next, FIGS. 50 to 54 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects executed when the above [F3] normal symbol is hit or not. In addition, although the example of production | presentation which loses was demonstrated in FIG. 47, in FIG.50-FIG.54, the example of production which wins (winning) or lose | disappears (non-winning) through a super reach production is demonstrated.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 50, (A): Similarly, the column of pseudo effect symbols GE (the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol) is arranged in the vertical direction on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol. For example, the variable display effect is started by scrolling from top to bottom.

  Further, during the normal symbol variation display, the true effect symbol SE is variably displayed at the right end of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the normal symbol fourth symbol FZ is also variably displayed.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
(B) in FIG. 50: Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a chance of winning is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect can be obtained in which the player has a sense of expectation that “the possibility of winning may increase to reach”.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 50: After the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “Leach Kashira” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second picture image is an advanced type that is one step further than the previous reach notice notice effect (first stage). In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) to be hit by this change by making the change in the aspect of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach reach to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
(D) in FIG. 50: The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol of the pseudo effect symbol GE is eventually stopped. At this point, the female character wearing the border pattern dress has stopped at the left side of the screen.

[Right stop design stop]
In FIG. 51 (D): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, the fluctuating display of the right effect symbol of the pseudo effect symbol GE is stopped. At this point, the production pattern of the female character wearing a one-piece with “H” is stopped. In this case, since the patterns of the left and right female characters do not match, it means that it is normally not won.

[Slip production]
In FIG. 51 (F): Here, a slip effect occurs with respect to the right effect symbol. The slip effect is an effect for changing an effect symbol once stopped to another effect symbol. In the example shown in the figure, a female character wearing a striped one-piece dress displayed on the left side sneezes, and character information “Haction” is displayed on the screen. Then, based on this sneezing action, the right effect design starts to change again.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 51 (G): Fluctuation display of the right effect design different from the previous right effect design is stopped by the slip effect. In the example shown in the figure, the production pattern of a female character wearing a striped one-piece dress is stopped at the right side of the screen, so that a reach state of one horizontal line (on one line) occurs on the screen. Yes. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed.

  After the reach state occurs, the following super reach effects are executed. In super reach production, reach production is performed by a pair of female characters wearing a border pattern dress.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 51, (H): When a reach state occurs, for a while, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group, and a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed that passes diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice effect after the visually lively reach occurs, the player can have an even greater expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 52 (I): The reach state continues even after the notice effect after the occurrence of reach is executed, and after that, the super reach effect proceeds. In the example shown in the figure, there is an effect in which two female characters wearing a striped pattern dress get on the plane. Then, an effect is produced in which two female characters who have boarded the plane uttered the line “Departure!”.

(J) in FIG. 52: Next, an effect is produced in which an airplane on which two female characters have entered slides down the slope. The tip of the slope is a jump stand.
In FIG. 52 (K): An effect in which an airplane carrying two female characters passes through a jumping table installed at the tip of the slope and jumps into the air is executed. If you do not fly well using the jumping platform, the airplane will fall into the sea in front of you and you will be out of place.

  In FIG. 52 (L): If you successfully take off using the jumping platform, the airplane that jumped out into the air will rise high in the sky, and the airplane carrying two female characters will fly toward the destination. Executed.

  In FIG. 53 (M): When a certain amount of flight time elapses, an island as an airplane destination is displayed. A flag with the word “GOAL” is placed at the center of the island to clarify the landing point. In this state, if the airplane has landed safely on the island that will be the goal point, it will be a hit, and if the airplane cannot land on the island that will be the goal point, it will be out of place. Therefore, this situation is the final stage of super reach production and is the most exciting part as a game.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 53 (N): When the super reach effect has reached the final stage, a cut-in notice effect is displayed, which is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the character image is divided into large shots. In the example shown in the figure, three female characters are displayed in a diagonally cut area on the screen, and a scene in which all female characters are praying with their hands together is displayed.

[When winning]
In FIG. 53 (O): When the variation of the normal symbol this time corresponds to the winning, an effect that the plane safely lands on the island as the goal point is executed. If the performance that the airplane landed safely is executed, it means that it is a win (winning).

  In FIG. 53 (P): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol corresponding to the normal symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol. The pseudo effect design GE is performed in a state where the left and right production designs by the female character are restored to their initial sizes. Further, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in a winning mode (“7”-“7”-“smile mark”) previously associated with winning. Furthermore, the fourth symbol FZ, which is a normal symbol, is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the hit (for example, a rhombus image of red display color).

  By performing such a fixed stop display, it is possible to teach the player that “per normal symbol” has been fixed in the production. However, in the present embodiment, since the hit of the normal symbol (operation lottery) does not guarantee the above [F19] high probability or [F31] time shortage, it is the content that appeals “winning” too much. Not. In other words, the display of the left effect and the right effect is limited to the display, or the display pattern of the lower effect is changed to a “smile mark” image different from the upper effect and the medium effect. The “three-piece” image that is generally adopted is relaxed to some extent.

[When not winning]
54 (Q): Even if the current variation of the normal symbol corresponds to non-winning, the super reach effect may be executed. And the point which the island used as the destination of an airplane is displayed during execution of a super reach production is the same as that of the production example demonstrated previously.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 54, (R): When the super reach effect has reached the final stage, a cut-in notice effect is suddenly displayed that is displayed so that the character image is split into a large image on the screen. In the example shown in the figure, a female character is displayed in an area cut diagonally on the screen, and a scene in which the female character is praying with both hands together is displayed. This cut-in notice effect is an effect executed by one female character unlike the previous effect example executed by three female characters, so that the expectation degree for hitting is not higher than before. It can be communicated to the player.

  In FIG. 54 (S): When the variation of the normal symbol this time is out of place, the effect that the plane falls to the sea in front is executed without landing on the island that is the goal point. If an effect is performed in which the airplane falls to the sea in front, it means that it is out of place (not winning).

  In FIG. 54 (T): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol corresponding to the normal symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol. The pseudo effect design GE is performed in a state where the left and right production designs by the female character are restored to their initial sizes. In addition, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in a mode of detachment (“1”-“2”-“×”). Further, the fourth symbol FZ, which is a normal symbol, is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the dislocation (for example, a rhombus image of white display color).

[Direction when variable start winning device is activated]
Next, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed when the [F4] variable start winning device is operated.

  FIG. 55A: In this example, for example, a female character appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and an effect of generating a dialogue such as “If you win the Janken Battle” is performed. With such an effect, it is possible to teach the player that an effect “Janken Battle” will be executed thereafter.

  Further, on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example, “right-handed” character information is displayed together with the background image, and an arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect). ). In the illustrated example, a band-like area is provided at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-like area. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to prompt the player to “right strike”.

  Here, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in a winning mode (“7”-“7”-“smile mark”) previously associated with the winning effect. In addition, the fourth symbol FZ, which is a normal symbol, is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the hit (for example, a rhombus image of red display color). Further, the special symbol effect symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the disengagement (image of “hyphen (−)”). Regarding the normal symbol, if there is a working memory of the lottery element, the next fluctuation may be started, but the end time of the normal symbol is set to be somewhat longer (for example, the end time of the variable winning device 30 elapses). By setting the end time of the normal symbol to end later than the time), it is possible to suppress the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol until the game in the variable winning device 30 ends.

In FIG. 55 (B): Following the previous dialogue production, the female character produces a production such as “Enter the chance zone!” As a result, the player can be instructed that the mode to be transferred is different depending on the victory or defeat of the “Janken Battle” that will be performed later, and when it wins, it will shift to an advantageous mode such as “Chance Zone”. This can be taught to the player.
Further, in the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, a launch position designation effect that suggests a right-handed strike is continued using a band-like region.

  FIG. 55 (C): After that, when a game ball enters the active variable start winning device 28 and the change of the special symbol is started, characters such as “Janken Battle Start!” Are displayed on the screen. An effect is displayed in which the displayed image is displayed. In addition, the special symbol effect symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner.

  On the other hand, when the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is finished and the end time of the variable start winning device 28 is started, the launch position designation effect is not executed. Specifically, the band-like image suggesting the right strike is deleted. Thereafter, it is not necessary to perform a right-handed stroke until the next variable winning device 30 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid launching a useless ball by not performing a launch position designation effect that suggests a right-handed strike. .

[Direction when special symbol changes]
FIG.56 and FIG.57 is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect performed at the time of said [F7] special symbol fluctuation | variation (within fluctuation time). In this example, the game flow is such that the winner is selected with a probability of 1/2 from the special symbol change of [F7], and proceeds to either the probability variation symbol 1, 2 winner of [F16] or the normal symbol 1 winner of [F11]. Assumed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), at the beginning of this production, images of female characters (left side) and enemy characters (right side) are displayed side by side, and each other rubs each other. A state where sparks are scattered in the middle is expressed stunningly by moving images. Further, by appropriately displaying characters such as “game” on the display screen, it is possible to remind the player that “the game of two players will finally start”. Further, at this time, the dialogue of each character (for example, “absolutely win!”, “Please come!”, Etc.) may be output as sound. In this case, for example, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the content of the dialogue (the more the content of the dialogue is more positive, the higher the degree of expectation).

  In FIG. 56 (E): In the middle of the production, the two characters disappear from the display screen and the character information “Janken” is displayed large. As a result, it is possible to remind the player of the notion that “characters are fighting against each other”. In addition, it may be a mode in which a shout, sound effect, BGM, etc., such as “Janken de match” are output as sound.

  In FIG. 56 (F): In the middle stage of the production, two characters display a moving image with the contents “Janken's hand out”. In this example, a series of appearances from the left side of the screen to the appearance of the friendly character's hand “choki” and the appearance of the enemy character's hand “par” from the right side of the screen are represented. At this time, in accordance with the movement of each character, a mode in which a shout such as “Janken-pon!” Is output as sound.

  In FIG. 57 (G): At the end of the production, it is displayed that the ally character has won the victory as a result of the game. In this example, the ally-winning character is a close-up in the center of the display screen, and the appearance of showing the victory V-sign beside the face is expressed in a stunning manner. In addition, by displaying the characters “I won” on the display screen, the player can be reminded of the idea of “winning Janken”.

  In FIG. 57 (H): After that, with the victory in the Janken Battle, a female character appears, and an effect is displayed in which an image on which characters such as “Enter Chance Zone !!” are displayed. As a result, it can be taught that “the transition to probability change has been confirmed at this big hit”. In addition, the special symbol effect symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the winning (image of “circle (◯)”).

  When the special symbol stop display time elapses and the variable winning device 30 shifts to the open waiting state, the launch position designation effect that suggests a right-handed strike is resumed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 using a band-like region. (Launch position designation effect). Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to “right-turn” again, and to promote the variable winning device 30 to enter the game ball.

  In FIG. 57 (I): Then, a game explanation effect is executed in which the female character utters a line such as “Start right-handed!”. Thereby, when the mode is the “chance zone”, it is possible to clearly tell the player that the game ball is caused to flow by flowing the game ball on the right side of the board surface. With such a game explanation effect, the game method in the “chance zone” allows a game ball to pass through the right start gate 21 or a game in which the variable start prize device 28 or the variable prize device 30 enters the game ball (wins). The player can be informed that it is a method.

[Examples of special symbols when not selected]
FIG. 58 is a continuous diagram showing an example of effects executed when the special symbol changes (within the change time) when not entering the chance zone. Specifically, in the case of proceeding from [F7] special symbol variation to [F8] non-winning, for example, the following effects are executed.

  In FIG. 58 (J): In this example, a series of scenes from the left side of the screen until the friendly character's hand “Choki” appears, and from the right side of the screen until the enemy character's hand “Goo” appears. Is expressed. In addition, the special symbol effect symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 58 (K): It is displayed that, as a result of the match, unfortunately the ally character has been defeated. In this example, the defeated ally character becomes a close-up in the center of the display screen, and the state of disappointment is expressed in a stunning manner. In addition, the display screen displays the letters “Lost ...”, reminding the player that he was defeated by Janken, “This time entering the chance zone. Can't be taught ". In addition, the special symbol effect symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in a mode (an image of “hyphen (−)”) corresponding to the deviation.

  In FIG. 58 (L): After that, when the special symbol stop display time elapses and the state shifts to the special symbol change waiting state, an effect is produced in which the female character emits a dialogue such as “Please challenge again!”. . Thus, the player can be informed that the mode returns to the “normal mode”.

[Direction during certain change]
Next, FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed when the game flow proceeds during the probability change of [F19] from the operation of [F18] variable winning device. Here, although “probability changing effect” is used, it may be an example of an effect executed when the game flow progresses to a chance zone that combines [F19] probability change and [F31] time.

  In FIG. 59 (A): For example, when the variable winning device [F18] is activated, for example, “right-handed” character information is displayed together with the background image on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the game area 8a is displayed. An arrow symbol indicating the right side of the is displayed (launch position designation effect). In the illustrated example, a band-like area is provided at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-like area. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to prompt the player to “right-hand” and to be aware that a winning accompanying the opening operation of the variable start winning device 28 or the variable winning device 30 occurs. . At this time, the background image represents, for example, a state in which a female character who has won in the previous production example is sitting relaxed.

  Further, the total number of game balls paid out by the payout control device 92 during the chance zone is displayed as payout points (reference symbol P) at the lower upper position in the screen. This payout point P indicates the number of payouts with prize balls at the present time in a situation where the user is staying in the chance zone. The payout point P indicates the number of payouts of pure game balls. However, since the game balls are actually shot out in the chance zone, the number of originally acquired balls is smaller than the payout points P. Value (for example, a value of about 80%).

  In the example shown in the figure, “00000 pt” is displayed as the payout point P, indicating that no single prize ball has been obtained at this time. Thereafter, when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, and the normal winning ports 22, 24, 25, the numerical value of the payout point P gradually increases.

  Further, a limiter remaining number meter (reference symbol M) corresponding to the remaining “limiter count”, for example, is displayed at the lower lower position in the screen. The limiter remaining number meter M displays the current “limiter”. The remaining number of times is displayed in a bar graph form. In this example, in the rectangular frame of the limiter remaining number meter M, the number of “limiter times” is 17 (maximum 18 times) in the state where 17 vertically long blocks except one at the right end thereof are lit. Represents. After this, when the game flow progresses during [F18] variable change from the [F18] variable winning device operation, the display of the limiter remaining number meter M is decreased by one and becomes 16 times.

  Here, during [F19] probability change and [F31] time reduction, the true effect symbol SE, the normal symbol 4th symbol FZ, and the special symbol effect symbol TZ are displayed at the left end position in the screen ( The same applies below). Here, all of the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a winning manner.

[Limiter remaining meter production]
59 (B): While the above [F19] probability change is repeated and the loop is repeated, “right-handed” character information is continuously displayed on the screen together with the background image, and the right portion in the game area 8a is also displayed. An arrow symbol is displayed. On the other hand, the limiter remaining number meter M is displayed in such a manner that the number of lighting blocks decreases one by one every time a probability variation winning occurs. With such a display mode of the limiter remaining number meter M, the player is reminded that the remaining number of limiters that are probably changing is gradually decreasing, and the internal information used in the actual game flow. ("Limiter count") can be transmitted (taught, suggested) to the player.

  In addition, as the payout point P, character information “00240pt” is displayed. This represents that 240 game balls have been paid out up to this point. Such a display mode of the payout point P can inform the player that “the profit is steadily gained in the chance zone” and improve the willingness to obtain further profit. .

[Details of the launch position designation effect and the payout effect]
60 to 65 are continuous diagrams for explaining the details of the launch position designation effect and the payout effect. Here, a case where a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, a case where a game ball enters the variable winning device 30, and a case where a game ball enters the normal winning port 25 will be described in order.

  In FIG. 60 (A): When the variable start winning device 28 operates in a chance zone (low probability time shortened state or high probability time shortened state, etc.), a band-like region is used at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. A launch position designation effect suggesting a right strike is executed. This firing position designation effect continues as long as the normal symbol memory exists, but when the normal symbol memory does not exist, the variable start winning device 28 enters the end time when the variable start winning device 28 is in operation. Continue until Here, “00000 pt” is displayed as the payout point P, and it is expressed that one prize ball is not obtained at the present time.

  In the illustrated example, the winning result is obtained by the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner. Therefore, the opening / closing member 28b of the variable start winning device 28 has its lower end edge hinged. Then, it is displaced to the open position so as to fall down to the front side, and the start winning opening 28a is opened. Thereby, it is possible to generate a ball into the start winning opening 28a.

In FIG. 60, (B): The game in the chance zone progresses, and the effect during the chance zone is continued on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42.
Here, the opening / closing member 28b of the variable start winning device 28 functions as a member for guiding the game ball 300 in the open state, and the game ball 300 flowing down from above the open variable start winning device 28 is the opening / closing member 28b. Is received and guided to enter the start winning opening 28a. The game ball 300 that has entered the variable start winning device 28 is detected by a start winning port switch 82 provided in the variable start winning device 28.

  In FIG. 60, (C): The game ball payout process is executed when the game ball 300 is detected by the start winning opening switch 82. Specifically, a process of paying out nine game balls is executed by the payout control device 92. Here, “00009pt” is displayed as the payout point P, indicating that nine prize balls have been obtained.

  In addition, when the game ball 300 is detected by the start winning port switch 82, the special symbol starts to change. In the illustrated example, a special symbol effect symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner.

  Here, it is assumed that the memory of the normal symbol no longer exists. Then, during the end time of the variable start winning device 28, the launch position designation effect is not executed. Specifically, the band-like image that suggests right-handedness is erased (no longer displayed). When there is no normal symbol memory, the left-handed area (first game area) is more advantageous than the right-handed area (second game area) depending on the arrangement of the normal winning holes and the number of normal winning holes. By not continuing to execute the launch position designation effect, it is possible to more accurately designate the direction in which the player's profit is greater.

  61 (D): When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode, the special symbol effect symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the winning mode, and the effect that the limiter remaining number meter M is decreased by one is executed. Is done. Further, when the winning result is obtained in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, and the pair of left and right opening / closing members 30a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, respectively. The opening width of the winning opening 30b is expanded to the left and right.

  When the special symbol stop display time elapses and the variable winning device 30 shifts to the open waiting state, the launch position designation effect that suggests a right-handed strike is resumed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 using a band-like region. (Launch position designation effect). Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to “right-turn” again, and to promote the variable winning device 30 to enter the game ball. Then, the launch position designation effect that suggests a right strike is continued until the end time of the variable winning device 30 elapses.

  In FIG. 61, (E): When the variable winning device 30 shifts to the open state, the game ball 300 can be inflowed, and the game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 30b. In the illustrated example, the game ball 300 is likely to enter the variable winning device 30. The left and right opening / closing members 30a of the variable winning device 30 function as members that guide the game ball 300 in the opened state, and the gaming balls 300 flowing down from above the open variable winning device 30 are received by the opening / closing member 30a. To enter the grand prize opening 30b.

In FIG. 61, (F): The currently executed round (the first round) is terminated when the count switch 84 provided in the variable winning device 30 detects that the game ball 300 has been entered, and the variable winning is completed. The device 30 is closed. Therefore, in this state, the game ball 300 does not enter the big winning opening 30b.
Then, the game ball payout process is executed when the game ball 300 is detected by the count switch 84. Specifically, the payout control device 92 executes a process of paying out 6 game balls. Here, “00015pt” is displayed as the payout point P, which indicates that a total of 15 prize balls have been obtained in the chance zone.

  In FIG. 62 (G): On the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the effect during the chance zone is continued. Further, when the next round (second round) is started, the variable winning device 30 is again opened.

  In FIG. 62 (H): When the variable winning device 30 shifts to the open state, the game ball 300 is allowed to flow in, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 30b. In the illustrated example, the game ball 300 is likely to enter the variable winning device 30.

In FIG. 62 (I): When the winning of the game ball 300 is detected by the count switch 84 provided in the variable winning device 30 in a state where the variable winning device 30 is open, the currently executed round (2 The round) is finished, and the variable winning device 30 is closed.
Then, the game ball payout process is executed when the game ball 300 is detected by the count switch 84. Specifically, the payout control device 92 executes a process of paying out 6 game balls. Here, “00021pt” is displayed as the payout point P, which represents that a total of 21 prize balls were obtained in the chance zone.

  In FIG. 63 (J): On the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the effect during the chance zone is continued. At the payout point P of the present embodiment, addition display is executed even when a game ball enters the normal winning opening. In the illustrated example, the game ball 300 is played on a nail above the normal winning opening 25.

  Here, it is assumed that the end time of the variable winning device 30 has elapsed, and that no normal symbol memory exists. Then, after the end time of the variable winning device 30 has elapsed, the launch position designation effect is not executed. Specifically, the band-like image suggesting the right strike is deleted. When there is no normal symbol memory, the left-handed area (first game area) is more advantageous than the right-handed area (second game area) depending on the arrangement of the normal winning holes and the number of normal winning holes. By not continuing to execute the launch position designation effect, it is possible to more accurately designate the direction in which the player's profit is greater.

  In FIG. 63 (K): On the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the effect during the chance zone is continued. This time, the game ball 300 has entered between the nails above the normal winning opening 25.

In FIG. 63 (L): On the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the effect during the chance zone is continued. Eventually, the game ball 300 enters the normal winning opening 25. The game ball 300 that has entered the normal winning opening 25 is detected by the winning opening switch 86.
A game ball payout process is executed when the game ball 300 is detected by the winning opening switch 86. Specifically, a process of paying out 10 game balls by the payout control device 92 is executed. Here, “00031pt” is displayed as the payout point P, which indicates that a total of 31 prize balls were obtained in the chance zone.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to teach a player an accurate profit including not only the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 but also the profit at the normal winning opening 25. Although it is rare for a game ball to enter the normal winning opening 25, the profit obtained in the chance zone can be accurately obtained by transmitting the profit including such a situation to the player. Can be taught.

  (M) in FIG. 64: On the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the effect during the chance zone is continued. Here, it is assumed that there is no normal symbol memory yet. In this case, in spite of the time shortening state, the launch position designation effect suggesting a right strike is not executed.

  Further, in the normal symbol display device 33, the stop display is continued in a state where the upper LED is lit (winning manner). Further, since there is no normal symbol memory, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is turned off. Furthermore, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is also turned off. However, since the chance zone is in a time shortening state, the time reduction state display lamp 38d is in a lighting state.

  (N) in FIG. 64: On the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the effect during the chance zone is continued. Here, it is assumed that the player has left-handed, the game ball has passed through the middle start gate 20, and a lottery opportunity for a normal symbol lottery has occurred. Then, in the normal symbol display device 33, the two symbols are alternately turned on and the normal symbol is variably displayed. Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the true effect design SE and the normal design 4th design FZ are variably displayed. Further, since the normal symbol is changing in the time shortening state, the launch position designation display lamp 38e is lit.

  When the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, the launch position designation effect suggesting a right-handed strike is resumed using the band-like area at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (launch position designation effect). Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to “right-turn” again, and to promote the variable start winning device 28 to enter the game ball.

  In FIG. 64 (O): On the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the effect during the chance zone is continued. Here, it is assumed that the winning result is obtained by the normal symbol lottery and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is finished. Then, in the normal symbol display device 33, a stop display at the time of winning is performed by turning on the upper lamp of the upper and lower two lamps. In addition, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (“7”-“7”-“smile mark”), and the 4th design FZ of the normal design is won. The display is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, a rhombus image of red display color).

  During the normal symbol stop display, the launch position designation effect that suggests a right-handed strike is continued on the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 using the band-like region (launch position designation effect). Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to “right hit” and to promote the variable start winning device 28 to enter the game ball.

  65 (P): On the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the effect during the chance zone is continued. Here, “00031pt” is displayed as the payout point P, indicating that 31 prize balls have been obtained so far.

In the illustrated example, the winning result is obtained by the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner. Therefore, the opening / closing member 28b of the variable start winning device 28 has its lower end edge hinged. Then, it is displaced to the open position so as to fall down to the front side, and the start winning opening 28a is opened. Thereby, it is possible to generate a ball into the start winning opening 28a.
Further, when the variable start winning device 28 operates in the chance zone, a launch position designation effect that suggests a right-handed strike is executed using a band-like region in the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 65, (Q): A game in the chance zone progresses, and an effect in the chance zone is continued on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42.
Here, the opening / closing member 28b of the variable start winning device 28 functions as a member for guiding the game ball 300 in the opened state, and the three game balls 300 flowing down from above the open variable start winning device 28 are opened / closed. It is received and guided by the member 28b and enters the start winning opening 28a. Three game balls 300 that have entered the variable start winning device 28 are detected by a start winning port switch 82 provided in the variable start winning device 28.

  In FIG. 65, (R): The game ball payout process is executed when the game ball 300 is detected by the start winning opening switch 82. Specifically, the payout control device 92 executes a process of paying out 27 game balls (3 balls × 9 prize balls). Here, “00058pt” is displayed as the payout point P, which indicates that 58 prize balls have been obtained so far.

  In addition, when the game ball 300 is detected by the start winning port switch 82, the special symbol starts to change. In the illustrated example, a special symbol effect symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner.

  In this case, it is assumed that a normal symbol memory exists. Then, even during the end time of the variable start winning device 28, the launch position designation effect is continued. When the memory of the normal symbol exists in the time shortening state, since the variable start winning device 28 immediately operates, it is more advantageous to make the right strike than the left strike. Thus, it is possible to specify the direction in which the player's profit is more accurately specified.

[Director on limiter]
Next, FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of effects that are executed when a limiter addition due to normal winning during probability change occurs. However, the actual number of extra additions differs depending on the number of remaining limiters at the time of occurrence, and it is difficult for the player to visually determine at which stage the extra addition occurred. Various aspects can be considered for the presentation technique (how to show) when expressing this on the presentation.

  In FIG. 66, (A): For example, even if the “limiter count” is internally increased by 10 times, it can be divided into 5 times and the additional effect can be executed twice. In this case, an image simulating a relatively small heart shape is displayed on the screen, and information on the number of times of addition, for example, “+5” is displayed inside the image. In addition, an effect of increasing the display of the limiter remaining number meter M by 5 times is performed (not shown). Thereby, it can be transmitted to the player that “the remaining limiter count has been added five times”. After that, for example, when the limiter remaining number meter M becomes less displayed, an additional effect for five times is executed. Thereby, although the number of times of addition per production is reduced, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and surprise by generating a number of addition effects. Here, “00540pt” is displayed as the payout point P, which represents that a total of 540 prize balls have been obtained in the chance zone.

  In FIG. 66 (B): Alternatively, when the limiter remaining number meter M has already been displayed with a small amount of remaining, the actual increase of 15 times can be expressed as an additional effect. In this case, an image simulating a relatively large heart shape is displayed on the screen, and information on the number of times of adding “+15” is displayed inside the image. In addition, an effect of increasing the display of the limiter remaining number meter M by 15 degrees at a stretch is performed (not shown). Thereby, it can be transmitted to the player that “the remaining limiter count has been added 15 times at a time”. Moreover, when the limiter remaining number meter M is displayed with a little remaining, an extra is generated, so that the tension of “the limiter may be lost” is released, and the feeling of relief and joy due to the extra is displayed. be able to. Here, “00840pt” is displayed as the payout point P, which represents that a total of 840 prize balls have been obtained in the chance zone.

[Director after reaching the limiter]
Next, FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed after reaching the limiter. For example, when the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0 times in the game flow, the following example effects are executed.

[End production]
In FIG. 67, (A): In this case, for example, character information of “chance zone end” is displayed on the screen, and the display number of the limiter remaining number meter M becomes zero. As a result, the player is instructed to “end during probability change” and contributes to maintaining motivation for the next probability change entry.

[Continuation (revival) production]
In FIG. 67 (B): On the other hand, when the shift is made to [F31] time reduction after reaching the limiter in the actual game flow, the continuation effect is executed following the end effect. In this case, an effect of dropping the movable body 40f to the front side of the liquid crystal display 42 is performed. In addition, the appearance as if the female character in the background image is surprised at the fall of the movable body 40f is expressed in a stunning manner. Then, at the lower position in the screen, for example, an effect is performed in which the display number of the limiter remaining number meter M returns to full (full) (18). Although not particularly illustrated, the movable body 40f may return to the original position after this, and a character such as “continuation of chance zone” may be displayed on the screen, for example. In any case, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player by executing such a continuous effect. Further, by using the movable body 40f, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal and maximize the effect of the presentation. Here, “001020pt” is displayed as the payout point P, which represents that a total of 1020 prize balls have been obtained in the chance zone.

[Background change production]
In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, when the “limiter count” decreases in the game flow, an effect of changing the background image according to the remaining count is performed.
FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a background image that changes as the game flow progresses.

[Initial stage production]
In FIG. 68, (A): For example, in the early stage of the transition to [F19] in the game flow, the background image is the “female character wearing yukata” and this is the “initial stage”, for example. . In this case, since the content of the background image is relatively calm, it is possible to express a stable impression that has just shifted to the probability change. Although not shown here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned limiter remaining number meter M, “right-handed” character display, and the like are displayed on the display screen (the same applies hereinafter).

[Yukata stage production]
In FIG. 68 (B): When the remaining “limiter count” decreases to some extent as the game flow progresses (for example, the remaining 17 to 14 times), the background image is changed based on a lottery for effect control. Production is performed. In this example, for example, a large “female character wearing a yukata” is displayed on the display screen, and this is, for example, a “yukata stage”. In this way, by performing an effect (stage change effect) that changes from the “initial stage” to the “yukata stage”, the visual impact on the player is enhanced, and [F19] Can give a sense of continuity and a sense of tension.

[Fireworks stage production]
In FIG. 68 (C): When the game flow further progresses and the “limiter count” gradually decreases (for example, the remaining 8 to 5 times), the background image is further changed based on the lottery for effect control. Production is performed. In this example, for example, the display screen is changed to “Landscape of fireworks in the night sky”, and “Scenery of another female character looking up at fireworks” is displayed in a stunning manner. In the present embodiment, this is, for example, a “fireworks stage”. By executing such an effect of changing to the “fireworks stage”, it is possible to finally make the player feel that the game in the middle of [F19] probability change has reached the climax.

[Festival stage production]
In FIG. 68 (D): In this example, the background image is changed to “festival scenery”, and in this embodiment, this is referred to as “festival stage”. This “festival stage” represents that the remaining “number of limiters” is small (for example, 4 to 1 time). By executing such an effect to change to the “festival stage”, the player can realize that [F19] the game that is undergoing certain change is low, or add it when the limiter arrives (or before it reaches). It can make you feel nervous about whether continuation will occur.

[Director after reaching the limiter]
Next, FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed when the chance zone is not re-entered after reaching the limiter (when returning to the normal game). For example, when the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0 times in the game flow, the following example effects are executed.

[End production]
In FIG. 69, (A): In this case, for example, the character information “chance zone end” is displayed on the screen, and the display number of the limiter remaining number meter M becomes zero. As a result, the player is instructed to “end during probability change” and contributes to maintaining motivation for the next probability change entry. Here, “003180pt” is displayed as the payout point P, and it is expressed that “3180” award balls are obtained in the chance zone in total.

  Here, for the details of “3180”, since it is assumed that 60 balls can be obtained on average every time one limiter is digested, since the first set has 17 limiters, “17 times × 60 = 1020 ”, and in the second and subsequent sets, assuming that there is no additional addition before the limiter count reaches 0, the limiter count is 18, so“ 18 times × 60 = 1080 ” Pieces ". And if the limiter count is returned to 18 times by the normal symbol winning when the limiter is reached (end revival), the number of balls for two sets is “1080 × 2 times = 2160”. The total number of balls to be played is “1020 + 2160 = 3180”.

[Game description production]
In FIG. 69 (B): [F1] When shifting to the normal game after reaching the limiter in the actual game flow, the game explanation effect is executed following the above-mentioned end effect. In this example, a female character appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and an effect of generating a dialogue such as "Please challenge again" is performed. In addition, an arrow symbol indicating the left portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect). In the example shown in the figure, a band-like area is provided at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and left-handed character information and a left-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-like area. By executing such an effect, it is possible to prompt the player to “left strike” and be aware that the chance zone has ended. At this time, sound may be generated from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 in accordance with the display of the dialogue as character information on the display screen.

  62 to 66 are continuous diagrams showing an example of the effect of the acquired profit teaching effect executed after the end of the chance zone.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 62 (A): After the chance zone is finished, before the first fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, the row of the two pseudo effect symbols GE is large in the central portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. Further, since the true effect design SE is in a state immediately after the end of the chance zone, it is stopped and displayed in a winning manner (“7”-“7”-“smile mark”). In accordance with this, the fourth symbol FZ corresponding to the normal symbol is also stopped and displayed in a winning manner (a diamond-shaped figure of red display color). In addition, the effect symbol TZ corresponding to the special symbol is also in a stopped state (“◯”) because it is in a state after the chance zone has ended.

  Further, in the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, all the four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of normal symbols is four. At the end of the chance zone, up to four normal symbol operation memories are stored, but the maximum number is stored in the illustrated example.

[Acquired profit teaching effect]
In addition, at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, an acquired profit teaching effect is executed.
Here, the acquired profit teaching effect is an effect of teaching the player information related to the profit obtained during the chance zone using the fluctuation time of the normal symbols for four fluctuations after the chance zone ends. . In the illustrated example, as the obtained profit teaching effect, character information “result”, “53 squares”, and “3180 pt” are displayed in the band-like area at the top of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  This means that the game result in the chance zone is “3180 balls were obtained by consuming 53 limiters”. Therefore, by this acquired profit teaching effect, the situation of the game in the chance zone and the number of consecutive resorts (number of continuations) can be confirmed. Note that such character information may be displayed by scrolling in the horizontal direction in the band-shaped region, but may be displayed in a stopped state in consideration of shooting with a mobile phone.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to confirm not only the total profit obtained in the chance zone but also how many times the limiter has been consumed, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction and satisfaction while making the content to be taught rich in variations.

  In the present embodiment, the acquired profit teaching effect is executed in the sub area (game result display area) SA1 other than the main area MA1 including the center of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The sub area SA1 is a strip area at the upper end of the display screen.

  Here, since the acquired profit teaching effect is an effect that is executed during fluctuation of the normal symbol, if it is executed too much, there is a possibility that the variable display effect by the pseudo effect symbol GE may be interrupted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by executing the acquired profit teaching effect in the sub area SA1 other than the main area MA1, the acquired profit teaching effect does not interfere with the variable display effect that plays the core role of the effect, and each effect Both productions can be performed in a balanced manner while taking into account the role of

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 62 (B): After the chance zone, the two pseudo effect symbols GE scroll and change on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in synchronization with the first change start of the normal symbol, thereby causing the variable display effect. Be started.

  Further, during the normal symbol variation display, the true effect symbol SE is variably displayed at the right end of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the normal symbol fourth symbol FZ is also variably displayed. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Left effect symbol stop]
62 (C): When a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design stops changing first. In this example, the left performance symbol expressed by the female character wearing a polka dot dress is stopped. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, since the number of memory of the normal symbol is decreased by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. Here, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted by one each in one direction (here, the left direction). The direction that goes is performed.

[Right effect design stop, stop display effect]
In FIG. 62 (D): The right effect design stops changing in synchronization with the stop display of the normal design (not necessarily at the same time). If the result of the current operation lottery is non-winning and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, each display design is similarly stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. . In this example, the production design expressed by the female character wearing a checkered dress is stopped.

  At this time, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in a mode (“1”-“2”-“×”) corresponding to the deviation. In addition, the fourth symbol FZ is also stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, a rhombus with a white display color) corresponding to the deviation. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 63, (E): After the chance zone is finished, before the second fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, the row of the two pseudo effect symbols GE is large in the central portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. In addition, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in a manner of detachment (“1”-“2”-“×”). In accordance with this, the fourth symbol FZ corresponding to the normal symbol is also stopped and displayed in an off-side manner (white display color rhombus figure).

  In addition, at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, three markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the normal symbol is three. In the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Variable display production start]
FIG. 63 (F): After the chance zone ends, in synchronization with the second fluctuation start of the normal symbol, the two pseudo effect symbols GE are scrolled and changed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Be started.

  Further, during the normal symbol variation display, the true effect symbol SE is variably displayed at the right end of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the normal symbol fourth symbol FZ is also variably displayed. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Left effect symbol stop]
In FIG. 63 (G): When a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design stops changing first. In this example, the left performance symbol expressed by the female character wearing a checkered dress is stopped. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, since the number of memory of the normal symbol is decreased by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. Here, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number is two, the two markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted by one each in one direction (here, the left direction). The direction that goes is performed.

[Right effect design stop, stop display effect]
In FIG. 63 (H): The right effect design stops changing in synchronization with the stop display of the normal design (not necessarily at the same time). If the result of the current operation lottery is non-winning and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, each display design is similarly stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. . In this example, the effect design expressed by the female character wearing a one-piece with “Peace characters” is stopped.

  At this time, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in a mode ("3"-"4"-"x") corresponding to the deviation. In addition, the fourth symbol FZ is also stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, a rhombus with a white display color) corresponding to the deviation. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 64, (I): After the chance zone is finished, before the third change of the normal symbol starts, the row of two pseudo effect symbols GE is large in the central portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. In addition, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in an out-of-phase manner (“3”-“4”-“×”). In accordance with this, the fourth symbol FZ corresponding to the normal symbol is also stopped and displayed in an off-side manner (white display color rhombus figure).

  In addition, at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, two markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of operating memories of normal symbols is two. In the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 64 (J): After the chance zone ends, in synchronization with the start of the third fluctuation of the normal symbol, the two pseudo-rendering symbols GE scroll on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, thereby causing a variable display effect. Be started.

  Further, during the normal symbol variation display, the true effect symbol SE is variably displayed at the right end of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the normal symbol fourth symbol FZ is also variably displayed. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Left effect symbol stop]
In FIG. 64 (K): When a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect symbol first stops changing. In this example, the left effect symbol expressed by the female character wearing a one-piece with “Peace characters” is stopped. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, since the number of memory of the normal symbol is decreased by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. Here, since the first working memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining one is left, one marker M1 remaining on the screen is shifted in one direction (here, leftward) by one. Has been done.

[Right effect design stop, stop display effect]
In FIG. 64 (L): The right effect design stops changing in synchronization with the stop display of the normal design (not necessarily at the same time). If the result of the current operation lottery is non-winning and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, each display design is similarly stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. . In this example, the production pattern expressed by the female character wearing a floral dress is stopped.

  At this time, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in a mode (“5”-“6”-“x”) corresponding to the deviation. In addition, the fourth symbol FZ is also stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, a rhombus with a white display color) corresponding to the deviation. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 65, (M): after the chance zone is finished, before the fourth change of the normal symbol is started, there is a large row of two pseudo effect symbols GE in the central portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. In addition, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in a manner of detachment (“5” − “6” − “×”). In accordance with this, the fourth symbol FZ corresponding to the normal symbol is also stopped and displayed in an off-side manner (white display color rhombus figure).

  Also, at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, one marker M1 is lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the normal symbol is one. In the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 65, (N): After the chance zone ends, in synchronization with the start of the fourth fluctuation of the normal symbol, the two pseudo-rendering symbols GE scroll on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, thereby causing the variable display effect. Be started.

  Further, during the normal symbol variation display, the true effect symbol SE is variably displayed at the right end of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the normal symbol fourth symbol FZ is also variably displayed. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, since the number of memory of the normal symbol is decreased by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. Here, the working memory at the head in the memory order is consumed and the rest is gone.

[Left effect symbol stop]
In FIG. 65, (O): When a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect symbol first stops changing. In this example, the left performance symbol expressed by the female character wearing a floral dress is stopped. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

[Right effect design stop, stop display effect]
In FIG. 65 (P): The right effect design stops changing in synchronization with the stop display of the normal design (not necessarily at the same time). If the result of the current operation lottery is non-winning and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, each display design is similarly stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. . In this example, the production pattern expressed by the female character wearing a star-shaped dress is stopped.

  At this time, the true effect design SE is stopped and displayed in a mode (“7”-“8”-“×”) corresponding to the dislocation. In addition, the fourth symbol FZ is also stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, a rhombus with a white display color) corresponding to the deviation. The acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed.

In FIG. 66 (Q): On the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the stop display effect is continuously performed in a manner representing the result of non-winning. At this time, the number of working memories of the normal symbol is 0, and the marker M1 is not displayed (the number of display is 0).
If a lottery opportunity for the normal symbol lottery does not occur in this state, the condition for starting the variable symbol display is not satisfied, so that no noticeable change occurs on the display screen for a while. Therefore, in this case, the stop display effect corresponding to the previous change is still displayed.

  66 (R): Since the acquired profit teaching effect is continuously executed even in this state, the player who wishes to shoot the acquired profit teaching effect can obtain a mobile phone with a camera function attached. Using 202, the game result displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 of the pachinko machine 1 can be photographed.

  66 (S): Unless the next normal symbol lottery trigger occurs, a stop display effect is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in a manner representing the result of non-winning, and the acquired profit teaching effect is also provided. It is running continuously.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 66 (T): After sufficiently confirming the game result by the acquired profit teaching effect, the game ball starts to be launched again, and when the game ball passes the middle start gate 20, the fifth time after the end of the chance zone. The change of the normal symbol of is started. In synchronization with the start of the normal symbol variation, the two pseudo effect symbols GE are scrolled and changed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to start the variable display effect.

  Further, during the normal symbol variation display, the true effect symbol SE is variably displayed at the right end of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the normal symbol fourth symbol FZ is also variably displayed. Then, the acquired profit teaching effect that has been continuously executed until now ends at the start of the fifth variation of the normal symbol.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the acquired profit teaching effect is executed not by executing the acquired profit teaching effect at the end of the chance zone but by using the fluctuation time of the normal symbol after the chance zone ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to confirm the acquisition profit obtained by the chance zone.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the acquired profit teaching effect is executed using the four fluctuations of the normal symbol after the end of the chance zone, the acquired profit teaching effect can be secured for a longer time, It is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to confirm the profits obtained.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the acquired profit teaching effect is terminated with the start of the five fluctuations of the normal symbol, so that the acquired profit teaching effect can be continued indefinitely depending on how the player plays. That is, if the game ball launch is stopped at the end of the chance zone, the fifth change of the normal symbol will not be reached. Therefore, if the desired profit teaching effect is to be continued, from the handle unit 16 when the chance zone ends. It means that you just have to release your hand and wait. For this reason, if the player selects a game method for stopping the launch of the game ball at the end of the chance zone, the acquired profit teaching effect can be continued indefinitely, so the player misses the opportunity to confirm the acquired profit Can be avoided.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of changes of the normal symbol reaches five times, the acquired profit teaching effect is positively ended, so the end point of the acquired profit teaching effect is clarified. By actively ending the acquired profit teaching effect, it is possible to inspire a new game motivation for the player to aim for the next winning.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described normal symbol deviation effect (FIGS. 47 and 54), normal symbol per-effect (FIGS. 50 to 53, FIG. 43), variable start winning device operation effect (FIG. 55), special symbol change effect (FIG. 56, FIG. 57, 58), Probability change effect (FIG. 59), Limiter addition effect (FIG. 66), Limiter effect after arrival (FIGS. 67, 69), Background change effect (FIG. 68), Launch position designation effect (FIG. 59) Etc.), auxiliary effects ((D) in FIG. 47) and the like are controlled through the following control processing.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes a command reception process (step S400), a launch position designation effect management process (step S401), an effect symbol management process (step S402), a normal symbol hit effect management process (step S404), and a display output process (step S405), a lamp driving process (step S406), an acoustic driving process (step S408), an effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The production commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a start gate passage command, a normal symbol operation memory number command, a start opening winning tone control command, a demonstration production command, a lottery result command, a variation pattern command, a variation Start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, time reduction function operation count command (count cut counter count command), limiter remaining command, error notification command, round count command, launch position designation command, special game There are a management status command, a normal game management status command, a prize ball content command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the launch position designation effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the launch position designation effect (launch position designation effect execution means). In this process, the contents of the launch position designation effect (FIG. 59 and the like) are controlled. Details of the launch position designation effect management process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the contents of the above-described normal symbol deviation effect (FIG. 47), normal symbol effect (FIGS. 50 to 53), and the like are controlled.

  Step S404: In the normal symbol after-effects management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effects after winning in the normal symbol lottery (operation lottery). For example, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of effects when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, and controls the contents of effects when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed. In this process, the above-described variable start winning device operation effect (FIG. 55), special symbol change effect (FIGS. 56, 57, 58), probability changing effect (FIG. 59, etc.), limiter addition effect (FIG. 66) The contents of the effect after reaching the limiter (FIGS. 67 and 69) and the background change effect (FIG. 68) are controlled. Note that the contents of the post symbol management processing for normal symbols will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S405: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 gives basic control information of the effect contents to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) (for example, the number of working memories of normal symbols, the variable effect pattern number, the notice effect) Number, effect mode number, limiter added effect pattern number, limiter remaining number meter display number pattern number, background change effect pattern number, revival effect pattern number, end effect pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed contents of the effect (acts as various effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives the various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52, the panel lamp 53, and the like (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the sound drive circuit 134 about the effect contents (for example, BGM, audio data, etc. during various effects). Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body solenoid 57 as a drive source, and performs an effect in synchronism with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 as described above or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the launch position designation effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Launch position designation production management process]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the launch position designation effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S420: The effect control CPU 126 loads a launch position designation command. The launch position designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130.

Step S422: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the content of the launch position designation command indicates right-handed (whether or not it indicates that a game ball should be launched into the second game area).
As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the launch position designation command indicates right-handed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S426. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the content of the launch position designation command indicates right-handed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S424.

  Step S424: The effect control CPU 126 corresponds to a non-time-short symbol (forcibly changed from “2 round probability variation 2” to “2 round normal symbol 2”) in the special symbol lottery when reaching the limiter, and then within a certain period. Confirm whether or not. Here, the fixed period can be defined as the normal symbol changes several times (for example, four changes) after the big hit game ends. These confirmations can be realized by using a normal game management status command, a special game management status command, a stop symbol command, a change start command, a symbol stop command, or the like.

As a result, when the special symbol lottery at the time of reaching the limiter corresponds to the non-short-time symbol and it is confirmed that it is within a certain period thereafter (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S428.
On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery at the time of reaching the limiter corresponds to a non-short-time symbol, and thereafter it cannot be confirmed that the normal symbol is in a state of waiting for change (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs the effect control process (FIG. 70). Return. Thereby, when the right-handed suggestion effect is being executed, the right-handed suggestion effect can be terminated.

  Step S426: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting to execute a process of selecting a right-handed suggestion effect (a right-handed effect executed using the band-like region). Specifically, a process for selecting an effect pattern shown in FIG. 59 and the like is executed.

Step S428: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a left-handed suggestion effect (left-handed effect executed using a band-like region). Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern shown in FIG.
When the above process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

  Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process and the normal symbol hit effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes a subroutine group of an execution selection process (step S450), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S452), an effect symbol change process (step S454), and an effect symbol stop display process (step S456). It is the composition which includes. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S450: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S452 to S456). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the change display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change pre-process (step S452) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S454) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S456) is selected. When the variable start winning device is operating (opening / closing operation, end process, etc.), the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S452 to S456). First, the effect symbol management process is terminated.

  Step S452: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol (symbol effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the reach effect according to various conditions (the lottery result, the variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the advance notice before the reach occurrence other than the pre-read notice effect pattern). Select a pattern, a notice pattern after reach, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S454: In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S456: In the effect symbol stop display process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means).
When the above process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S405 in FIG. 70) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 70). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a win, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. Note that whether or not the current variation is off (winning) can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a hit pseudo-effect symbol variation effect pattern selection process (first effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines the contents (schedule, performance execution timing) such as effects, reach effects, pre-read effects, etc. related to the pseudo-effects symbol performed during the normal symbol fluctuation display. Perform configuration.

  Specifically, it is decided which female character will generate the reach effect, and from there, the left effect symbol and the variable effect display mode of the right effect symbol are determined, and finally the two pseudo effect symbols are selected. An effect pattern to be stopped and displayed in a mode (a mode in which characters with the same pattern are displayed on the left and right) is selected. Note that the details of the win-time pseudo effect design variation effect pattern selection process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a true effect symbol variation effect pattern selection process (second effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines an effect related to a true effect symbol (variation effect pattern or the like) performed during normal symbol variation display, and executes setting of the determined content.

  Specifically, the upper, middle, and lower performance symbols are initially varied at a low speed, gradually varied at a high speed, and finally the true performance design is changed to a winning mode (“7”-“7”-“smile Mark ") to select a production pattern to be stopped.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fourth symbol variation effect pattern selection process at the time of hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines an effect related to the fourth symbol performed during the normal symbol variation display, and executes setting of the determined content.

  Specifically, the display color of the 4th symbol is switched at high speed (white → red → green → blue → orange → purple → black), and finally the 4th symbol is selected (red rhombus figure) Select the production pattern to be stopped and displayed.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a pseudo effect design variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines the contents (schedule, performance execution timing) such as effects, reach effects, pre-read effects, etc. related to the pseudo-effects symbol performed during the normal symbol fluctuation display. Perform configuration.

  Specifically, it decides which female character will execute the non-reach production and the reach production, and then reversely calculates from there to determine the variation display mode of the left production design and the right production design, and finally two pseudo productions. An effect pattern is selected in which symbols are stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (a manner in which characters with the same pattern or characters with different patterns are displayed on the left and right).

  Step S618: The effect control CPU 126 executes a true effect symbol variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines an effect related to a true effect symbol that is performed during normal symbol variation display, and executes setting of the determined content.

  Specifically, the upper, middle, and lower production symbols are initially changed at a low speed, and gradually changed at a high speed. Finally, the true production design is changed to a non-winning mode (“any of 1 to 9”-“ The production pattern to be stopped and displayed is selected by “any one of 1 to 9” − “cross mark (×)”).

  Step S620: The effect control CPU 126 executes the 4th symbol variation effect pattern selection process at the time of detachment. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines an effect related to the fourth symbol performed during the normal symbol variation display, and executes setting of the determined content.

  Specifically, the display color of the 4th symbol is switched at high speed (white → red → green → blue → orange → purple → black), and finally the 4th symbol is not selected (rhombus shape with white display color) ) To select a production pattern to be stopped and displayed.

  When the process of either step S614 or step S620 described above is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S622.

  Step S622: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, an internal lottery result (winning or non-winning) and a current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that the player will eventually win. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

Step S624: The effect control CPU 126 executes auxiliary effect pattern selection processing (auxiliary effect executing means). Specifically, a speaker 54, 55 displays an effect pattern that causes an effect object (reference symbol Y1) to emit light upon receipt of a symbol stop command corresponding to the normal symbol, and a normal symbol stop display sound (reference symbol Y2). , 56 is selected (see (D) in FIG. 47).
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 72).

[Simulation effect design variation effect pattern selection process for hits]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned hit-time pseudo effect design variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S700: The effect control CPU 126 loads the variation pattern command. The variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the content of the variation pattern command indicates “variation pattern after reach”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the variation pattern command is “variation pattern after reach” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S704. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the content of the variation pattern command is not “variation pattern after reach”, that is, when it is confirmed that the content of the variation pattern command is “variation pattern per non-reach” (No), The control CPU 126 executes step S706.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 executes reach effect pattern selection processing (reach effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is a hit through the reach effect. Specifically, a process for selecting an effect pattern shown in FIGS. 50 to 53 and the like is executed.

  Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes non-reach effect pattern selection processing (special winning effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is a hit without going through the reach effect. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern shown in FIG. 43 is executed.

  And after finishing the process of step S704 or step S706, the production control CPU 126 returns to the production symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 73).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, step S704 is basically executed at the time of winning, and winning is achieved through reach production. However, when “non-reach fluctuation pattern” is selected, step S706 is executed. In some cases, it may be won without going through reach production. Then, by including an effect that is won without going through a reach effect, the player can be surprised and surprised. However, in this case as well, the true performance symbol SE is stopped and displayed in a specific winning manner (“7”-“7”-“smile mark”). Even if you win, you can notice that and you can improve the fun of the game.

[Normal presentation management processing per symbol]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the configuration of the post effect management process for normal symbols. For example, the after-hit effect management process for the normal symbol is, for example, an execution selection process (step S500), an initial variable start winning device operation process (step S502), a special symbol change-time effect process (step S504), and a major role start effect process (step S506). ), A group of subroutines for the end effect process (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the normal effect management process per normal symbol as the return address in the “jump table”. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, the effect control CPU 126 selects the first variable start winning device operating process (step S502) as the first jump destination. On the other hand, if the first variable start winning apparatus operation process (step S502) has already been completed and a special symbol variation pattern command (or a start opening winning sound control command) has been received, the effect control CPU 126 can As a jump destination, the special symbol variation effect process (step S504) is selected. Also, if the special symbol variation effect processing (step S504) is completed and the winning command for the special symbol (internal lottery) has been received, the effect control CPU 126 will perform the effect processing after starting the big role as the next jump destination (step S506) is selected. Then, the effect control CPU 126 selects the end process (step S508) as the next jump destination when the end flag is set in the effect process after the start of the big role. Note that the first variable start winning device activation process (step S502) and the special symbol variation effect process (step S504) are not selected as jump destinations when a state designation command representing "time reduction state" is received. This is because, when the game flow is once shifted to the “time reduction state” ([F19] during probability change or [F31] time reduction), the center of the effect content is the above-described effect during change (FIG. 59) or limiter addition effect (FIG. 66), the effect after reaching the limiter (FIG. 67), the background change effect (FIG. 68), etc., so during this time the variable start winning device operating effect (FIG. 55) and the special symbol change effect (FIG. 56, FIG. This is because it is not necessary to execute 57).

  Step S502: In the first variable start winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect when the variable start winning device 28 is operated after the first hit of the normal symbol (operation lottery). The contents of the effects controlled here are the same as the effects when the variable start winning device is operated ((B), (C), etc. in FIG. 55), and the progress status in the game flow is guided to the player. To do. By executing such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from digesting the game indiscriminately and to reconfirm the purpose consciousness to prevent a decrease in gaming motivation.

  Step S504: In the special symbol variation production process, the production control CPU 126 can produce the content corresponding to the special symbol variation display or stop display. The content of the effect controlled here is the same as the special symbol change effect (FIGS. 56 and 57) described above. By performing such an effect, the player has a sense of expectation whether or not he / she can enter the chance change (chance zone) due to the special symbol (internal lottery) fluctuation after the first winning of the normal symbol (action lottery), It is possible to provide fun and fun.

In the special symbol variation effect processing, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the special symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation display and stop display.
Specifically, you can switch the image of the special design effect at high speed ("hyphen (-)"->"circle(○)"->"triangle(△)"->"square(□)") In the end, select the effect pattern that stops the special symbol effect design in the winning mode (circle image (○) image), and if it is off, the special symbol effect design is finally unselected ( An effect pattern to be stopped and displayed is selected in "Hyphen (-) image".

  Step S506: In the effect process after the start of the big role, the effect control CPU 126, as described above, the effect during probability change (FIG. 59), the limiter addition effect (FIG. 66), the effect after reaching the limiter (FIG. 67), and the background change effect (FIG. 68). Etc. are controlled. As a result, information on the flow and progress of the game after the game flow has changed to [F19] Probability Change or [F31] Time Shortening is communicated to the player, or the “limiter count” addition is strongly urged. Can be. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S508: In the end effect process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the effect accompanying the end of [F19] probability change. The content of the effect controlled here is the same as the aspect ((A) in FIG. 67) representing the “end of chance zone” among the effects after reaching the limiter described above. By executing such an effect, once the [F19] probability change is completed, the player is informed in the game flow, and the game motivation is maintained for the next transition to [F19] probability change. Can be made.
When the above process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Direction processing after the start of a major role]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect process after the start of a big game. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

[Limiter number management processing]
Step S7000: The effect control CPU 126 executes limiter number management processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 manages limiter values necessary for effects in this process. The limiter value is a value corresponding to the limiter remaining number command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the effect control CPU 126, and the effect control CPU 126 stores the limiter value in the RAM 150.

[Chance zone production management process]
Step S7200: The effect control CPU 126 executes a chance zone effect management process. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 sets the contents of the production during the chance zone executed on the screen. For example, an effect pattern such as a probabilistic effect that represents a female character sitting on a chaise lounge is selected.

[Meter production management process]
Step S7400: The effect control CPU 126 executes meter effect management processing. In this meter effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 creates an effect pattern for executing the remaining number transmission effect by the limiter remaining number meter M based on the limiter remaining number command (remaining number information, limiter value stored in the RAM 150). select. Note that the limiter remaining number command is a command transmitted during the special symbol stop display.

  Here, when the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of reducing the scale of the limiter remaining number meter M by 1, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of adding one consumption limiter number stored in the RAM 150. The initial value of the number of consumption limiters is “0”, which is incremented during the chance zone and is reset when the acquired profit teaching effect ends.

[Point production management processing]
Step S7600: The effect control CPU 126 executes a point effect management process. In this point effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that teaches the total number of points by the payout point P based on the prize ball content command. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the normal effect management process (FIG. 75).

[Point production management processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the point effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a prize ball content command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a prize ball content command is stored.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the prize ball content command is stored (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S902, and when it is not possible to confirm that the prize ball content command is saved (No), the production The control CPU 126 returns to the effect process (FIG. 76) after the start of the big role.

Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the content of the prize ball content command corresponds to the first profit.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the prize ball content command corresponds to the first profit (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S906, and the content of the prize ball content command corresponds to the first profit. When it is not possible to confirm that it is to be performed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S904.

Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the content of the prize ball content command corresponds to the second profit.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the prize ball content command corresponds to the second profit (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S908, and the content of the prize ball content command corresponds to the second profit. When it is not possible to confirm that it is to be performed (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the content of the prize ball content command corresponds to the third profit, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S910.

  Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 executes a first increase effect pattern selection process. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 126 receives a prize ball instruction command corresponding to the first profit, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that increases the total number of payout points P by 9 points (see (C) in FIG. 60). ).

  Step S908: The effect control CPU 126 executes a second increase effect pattern selection process. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 126 receives a prize ball instruction command corresponding to the second profit, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that increases the total number of payout points P by 6 points (see (F) in FIG. 61). ).

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 executes a third increase effect pattern selection process. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 126 receives a prize ball instruction command corresponding to the third profit, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that increases the total number of payout points P by 10 points (see (L) in FIG. 63). ).

  When any one of steps S906 to S910 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S912.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 executes a total point number update process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 is stored in the RAM 150 in correspondence with the point increase effect executed in any one of steps S906 to S910 (according to the increase in the total number of payout points P). Execute the process to increase the total number of points. The initial value of the total number of points is “0”, which is updated every prize ball in the chance zone, and is reset when the acquired profit teaching effect ends.

[Summary of production techniques]
According to the example of the production method described above, information useful to the player can be provided as production in accordance with the progress of the game flow in the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, (1) the necessity of “right-handed” has occurred per normal symbol, and (2) internal lottery (special figure fluctuation) due to winning at the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a). (3) Winning in the internal lottery (with time reduction at the time of the first hit), (4) The game flow is changing to [F19] probability change or [F31] time reduction (rushing in) (5) [F19] The remaining “limiter count” decreases during certain changes, (6) “Limiter count” increases, (7) After reaching the limiter [F31] [F19] Information that the opportunity to return to the probability change has occurred, and (8) the fact that [F19] the probability change is ended by reaching the limiter and the game flow is returned to [F1] normal game, etc. Provide direct to the player by directing Teaching, it is possible to suggest). Further, regarding (3) above, it can also be provided as information that the winning in the probable variation pattern was not obtained in the internal lottery.

  Thereby, the player can fully enjoy the game performance by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment while preventing the game from being performed indiscriminately while the progress of the game flow is not understood by the player. In addition, by clearly realizing from the contents of the production that the “limiter count” has actually increased in the game flow, it is possible to give the player his own game outcome ([F19] 2% normal win during probability change) The player can feel a certain level of satisfaction and achievement. Alternatively, by clearly realizing from the contents that the resurgence occurred after reaching the limiter in the game flow, the player's own game achievement (57% after the limiter was reached and the normal win was assigned) ) Realize it, so that the player can have a certain level of satisfaction and achievement.

  In particular, in the internal game flow, the contents of the actual control processing are complicated for the mechanisms (6) and (7) above, but in the present embodiment, this is transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner as performance information In that respect, not only the game flow but also the production technique is excellent.

[Usefulness in game flow]
In addition, in the present embodiment, the original game flow itself has the following utility.
(1) For example, [F16] The right (possibility) to generate a loop during [F19] probability change continuously 17 times including the first time by winning the [F16] probability change symbol 1 and 2 from the normal game To do. Accordingly, the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a winning ball through the [F22] variable start winning device operation and the [F18] variable winning device operation for each loop, and the profit can be increased.

(2) Furthermore, if [F19] normal symbol 1 winning is assigned in the middle of [F19] probabilistic change loop, [F38] probable symbol 1 and 2 winning (98% probable change ratio) occurs after [F31] time reduction. It is easy to re-loop into [F19] probability change. In this case, since the “limiter count” is reset (reset) as described above, a new “limiter count” is added to the amount that has been digested in the previous loop. Become. As a result, the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a winning ball through the [F22] variable start winning device operation and the [F18] variable winning device operation, and the profit can be further increased.

(3) Also, even if [F19] no extra occurrence occurs in the loop under certain probability and the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0, [F43] normal symbol 1 win or [F45] Probability change symbol 1 win → compulsory normal symbol 1 (synthetic selection ratio 57%), it is possible to resume the loop [F19] change in probability after passing [F31] time. Also in this case, since the “limiter count” is reset (reset), a new “limiter count” is added to the amount that has been digested during the loop before reaching the limiter. . As a result, the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a winning ball through the [F22] variable start winning device operation and the [F18] variable winning device operation, and the profit can be further increased.

(4) In addition, since the profit of (2) or (3) may occur randomly according to the result of the special symbol (internal lottery), the above (2) and (3) occur in a chain. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property that can add a ball to the ball each time.

(5) In addition, in this type of pachinko game, drawing a probabilistic symbol basically generates continuity of profit (so-called continuous chain). The common sense of gaming is that sex ends. However, in this embodiment, [F19] Draws regular symbols during probability change to generate continuity of profits, which is significant in that it achieves game characteristics using the concept of reversal from the conventional one. It is useful.

(6) In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to determine that the right-handed condition is satisfied when any one of the four conditions from the first condition to the fourth condition regarding the right-handed condition is satisfied. In a situation where a game ball does not enter the variable winning device or the variable start winning device (a situation where it is unlikely to enter), it is not possible to suggest a right-handed strike, and if it is a big hit state or a time-shortened state, it is uniformly right-handed. As compared with the control method that suggests, the launch position can be specified more appropriately.

  The present invention can employ various modifications without being limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, the images and operations given as examples of various production methods are merely examples, and these can be modified as appropriate.

  In addition, the conditions such as the probability of lottery and the variation time of the symbols, the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, the closing time, the number of times of opening, the number of winning balls, etc. mentioned in the embodiment are merely examples, You may deform | transform suitably. Further, the arrangement of the various start gates 20 and 21, the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30 and the like in the game area 8 may be variously modified.

  In the embodiment described above, the example in which two or more variable display dedicated images are set for the winning image and the non-winning image has been described, but only one is set for the winning image and the non-winning image. May be. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the variable display-dedicated images are set to a maximum of five has been described, but a smaller or larger number of images may be set.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a pseudo effect symbol and a true effect symbol are set for a normal symbol has been described. However, a pseudo effect symbol and a true effect symbol may be set for a special symbol.

  In addition, the structure of the pachinko machine 1 and the board surface configuration are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Middle start gate 21 Right start gate 28 Variable start prize device 30 Variable prize device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 Special symbol display device 42 Liquid crystal display device 70 Main control Device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (3)

A first start gate installed in a first game area and generating a first stage lottery opportunity by randomly passing game balls flowing down the first game area;
A second start gate that is installed in a second game area that is disadvantageous to the first game area, and that causes a game ball flowing down the second game area to randomly pass to generate the first stage lottery opportunity When,
When the first stage lottery opportunity occurs during the game, the first stage lottery execution is executed to execute the first stage lottery related to the generation of the second stage lottery opportunity different from the first stage lottery opportunity Means,
When the second-stage draw trigger occurs during the game, and the second stage lottery execution means for executing a second stage drawing that involved in whether or not to apply certain conditions as a condition of the first stage drawing ,
When the first stage lottery is executed by the first stage lottery execution means, the first symbol is stopped in a manner that represents the result of the first stage lottery after the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. A first symbol display means for displaying;
When the second stage lottery is executed by the second stage lottery execution means, the second symbol is stopped in a manner that represents the result of the second stage lottery after the second symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. A second symbol display means for displaying;
The non-operation that is installed in the second game area and is difficult to generate the second stage lottery opportunity when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by the first symbol display means. A variable start winning device that performs an operation of changing from the state to an operation state in which the second stage lottery trigger is easily generated;
From the non-actuated state where it is difficult to generate a special prize for a specified period of time when the second symbol is displayed in a specific winning manner by the second symbol display means in the second game area. A variable winning device for executing a special game by performing an operation that changes to an operating state in which the occurrence of the special winning is easy,
When a lottery result indicating that the specific condition is applied to the first stage lottery is obtained in the second stage lottery, the second stage at least at a normal frequency after the end of the special game by the variable winning device. A time shortening state transition means for shifting from a non-time shortening state in which a lottery trigger for lottery occurs to a time shortening state in which a lottery trigger for the second stage lottery occurs at a higher frequency than the non-time shortening state; ,
If the first stage lottery trigger occurs before the start condition for starting the variable display of the first symbol by the first symbol display means is satisfied, the lottery elements necessary for the execution of the first stage lottery are displayed. Lottery element acquisition means to acquire;
Lottery element storage means for storing the lottery elements acquired by the lottery element acquisition means;
While it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition relating to the launch position of the game ball is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the game ball should be fired in the first game area Launch position determining means for determining that a game ball should be launched into the second game area when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Wherein as the predetermined condition, and a firing position designated condition defining means for defining a condition relating to the storage number of the extracted selection elements that put on at least the time saving state,
The launch position designation condition defining means includes:
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined condition defines a condition that the variable start winning device is in an operating state in the non-time-reduced state. A first start gate installed in a first game area and generating a first stage lottery opportunity by randomly passing game balls flowing down the first game area;
A second start gate that is installed in a second game area that is disadvantageous to the first game area, and that causes a game ball flowing down the second game area to randomly pass to generate the first stage lottery opportunity When,
When the first stage lottery opportunity occurs during the game, the first stage lottery execution is executed to execute the first stage lottery related to the generation of the second stage lottery opportunity different from the first stage lottery opportunity Means,
If the second-stage draw trigger occurs during the game, and the second stage lottery execution means for executing a second stage drawing that involved in whether or not to apply certain conditions as a condition of the first stage drawing ,
When the first stage lottery is executed by the first stage lottery execution means, the first symbol is stopped in a manner that represents the result of the first stage lottery after the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. A first symbol display means for displaying;
When the second stage lottery is executed by the second stage lottery execution means, the second symbol is stopped in a manner that represents the result of the second stage lottery after the second symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. A second symbol display means for displaying;
The non-operation that is installed in the second game area and is difficult to generate the second stage lottery opportunity when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by the first symbol display means. A variable start winning device that performs an operation of changing from the state to an operation state in which the second stage lottery trigger is easily generated;
From the non-actuated state where it is difficult to generate a special prize for a specified period of time when the second symbol is displayed in a specific winning manner by the second symbol display means in the second game area. A variable winning device for executing a special game by performing an operation that changes to an operating state in which the occurrence of the special winning is easy,
When a lottery result indicating that the specific condition is applied to the first stage lottery is obtained in the second stage lottery, the second stage at least at a normal frequency after the end of the special game by the variable winning device. A time shortening state transition means for shifting from a non-time shortening state in which a lottery trigger for lottery occurs to a time shortening state in which a lottery trigger for the second stage lottery occurs at a higher frequency than the non-time shortening state; ,
If the first stage lottery trigger occurs before the start condition for starting the variable display of the first symbol by the first symbol display means is satisfied, the lottery elements necessary for the execution of the first stage lottery are displayed. Lottery element acquisition means to acquire;
Lottery element storage means for storing the lottery elements acquired by the lottery element acquisition means;
While it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition relating to the launch position of the game ball is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the game ball should be fired in the first game area Launch position determining means for determining that a game ball should be launched into the second game area when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Wherein as the predetermined condition, and a firing position designated condition defining means for defining a condition relating to the storage number of the extracted selection elements that put on at least the time saving state,
The launch position designation condition defining means includes:
The predetermined condition includes a condition that the first symbol is variably displayed in the time shortening state, a condition that the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the time shortening state, or the time shortening state. A game machine characterized in that a condition that the variable start winning device is in an operating state is defined. A first start gate installed in a first game area and generating a first stage lottery opportunity by randomly passing game balls flowing down the first game area;
A second start gate that is installed in a second game area that is disadvantageous to the first game area, and that causes a game ball flowing down the second game area to randomly pass to generate the first stage lottery opportunity When,
When the first stage lottery opportunity occurs during the game, the first stage lottery execution is executed to execute the first stage lottery related to the generation of the second stage lottery opportunity different from the first stage lottery opportunity Means,
When the second-stage draw trigger occurs during the game, and the second stage lottery execution means for executing a second stage drawing that involved in whether or not to apply certain conditions as a condition of the first stage drawing ,
When the first stage lottery is executed by the first stage lottery execution means, the first symbol is stopped in a manner that represents the result of the first stage lottery after the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. A first symbol display means for displaying;
When the second stage lottery is executed by the second stage lottery execution means, the second symbol is stopped in a manner that represents the result of the second stage lottery after the second symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. A second symbol display means for displaying;
The non-operation that is installed in the second game area and is difficult to generate the second stage lottery opportunity when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by the first symbol display means. A variable start winning device that performs an operation of changing from the state to an operation state in which the second stage lottery trigger is easily generated;
From the non-actuated state where it is difficult to generate a special prize for a specified period of time when the second symbol is displayed in a specific winning manner by the second symbol display means in the second game area. A variable winning device for executing a special game by performing an operation that changes to an operating state in which the occurrence of the special winning is easy,
When a lottery result indicating that the specific condition is applied to the first stage lottery is obtained in the second stage lottery, the second stage at least at a normal frequency after the end of the special game by the variable winning device. A time shortening state transition means for shifting from a non-time shortening state in which a lottery trigger for lottery occurs to a time shortening state in which a lottery trigger for the second stage lottery occurs at a higher frequency than the non-time shortening state; ,
If the first stage lottery trigger occurs before the start condition for starting the variable display of the first symbol by the first symbol display means is satisfied, the lottery elements necessary for the execution of the first stage lottery are displayed. Lottery element acquisition means to acquire;
Lottery element storage means for storing the lottery elements acquired by the lottery element acquisition means;
While it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition relating to the launch position of the game ball is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the game ball should be fired in the first game area Launch position determining means for determining that a game ball should be launched into the second game area when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
As the predetermined condition, the firing position designated condition defining means for defining a condition relating to the storage number of the extracted selection elements that put on at least the time saving state,
Determination content storage means for storing the determination content by the launch position determination means,
Based on the determination content stored in the determination content storage means, an external signal having a content indicating that a game ball should be fired in the first game area is generated or a game ball is generated in the second game area. An external signal generating means for generating an external signal having a content indicating that it should be fired;
A gaming machine comprising: external signal transmission means for transmitting an external signal generated by the external signal generation means to an external device.

Images